Home

Survey Pro Help 5.00 - Accurate Instruments

1. Idaho 12 10 rel ell cee W a aa EEEE E Alaska m Hawaii Ilinois 500 Indiana oe Maine po ci Ww seas Mississippi E 850 w pow Missouri E 9o30 e po w po E ms woss _ 71 7140 7440 a 20 06 15 07 50 4 20 6 35 Z lt ped a ped on New Hampshire ew aa New York 07 50 2 7230 Wyoming CO a e forza _ B osas 4 11005 Lambert Zones Survey Pro Help 5 00 Central Meridian and Zone Constants for State Plane Coordinates N North S South C Central 234 Survey Pro Help 5 00 NC North Central SC South Central M Mainland I Island O Offshore State oe came Meridian Constant 92 00 0 559691 Moo Mso 11615 0 549518 11820 0 561243 10530 0 646133 10530 0 630690 10530 0 613378 8430 0 502526 9330 0 677745 9330 0 658701 9800 0 632715 9830 0 614528 8415 0 622067 8545 0 606462 9230 0 528701 500013 b120 0 454007 7700 0 627634 7130 0 671729 7030 0 661095 8700 0 722790 8420 0 706407 8420 0 680529 9306 _ 0 741220 9415 0 723388 lorida Iowa Kansas Louisiana Maryland Michigan Minnesota PEEP EEE EEF N Arkansas 7 Kentucky 84 20 700928 Montana 109 30 746452 109 30 733354 235 10930 0 714901 Nebraska N 100 00 67345 1 S
2. The Choose Polyline screen is used to select an existing polyline that defines a boundary for your non reference DTM surface 57 Survey Pro Help 5 00 All the polylines in the current job are displayed Select the appropriate polyline and tap Add Edit Break lines Job View DTM Breaklines The Add Edit Break lines screen is used to select edit create or delete the break lines that will be used when computing the DTM The break lines that will be used when computing the DTM are listed in this screen Edit Opens the Edit Polyline screen where the selected polyline can be modified or a new polyline can be created Delete Move the selected polyline to the Auxiliary layer Add Existing Displays all the polylines in the current job Selecting a polyline and tapping will move the selected polyline to the DTM layer Note If a boundary is defined only polylines that fall within the boundary can be added New Opens the New Polyline screen which is identical to the Edit Polyline screen and is used to create a new polyline Edit Polyline Job View DTM Break lines Edit or Job View DTM Break lines New The Edit Polyline screen is used to perform some preliminary editing to a polyline prior to accessing the polyline editor with the Edit key Tap Points Allows you to tap points to define a new polyline If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing th
3. Base Info Survey Base Info The Base Info screen is used to display the details about the currently set RTK base receiver This menu item is not available when the base receiver is not yet set Base Point Displays the current base point name Latitude Displays the current latitude of the base point set in the software Longitude Displays the current longitude of the base point set in the software Height Displays the current height of the base point set in the software Antenna Displays the details about the base receiver antenna Projection Survey Projection The Projection Information screen is used to select and solve the horizontal and vertical projections which are used to transform GNSS measured WGS84 coordinates latitude longitude height into local coordinates North East Elevation The upper portion of the screen displays the status and details on the current projection mode The screen is also used to switch between Mapping Plane Mode and Default Ground Calibration mode The buttons available will vary depending on the current projection mode Projection Default Ground Calibration Mode The Projection screen is described here for when the horizontal projection mode is set to Default Ground Calibration Use this setting when you want ground level coordinates and there is no projection and no datum to define a geodetic coordinate transformation In this mode a default map projection is created with th
4. Button Label This is the text that will appear on the selected button A maximum of 5 characters can be entered here Actual Text This is the text that will be entered in the upper portion of the Raw Data Note screen when the selected button is tapped A maximum of 127 characters can be entered here Saves the changes and returns to the previous screen Cancels any changes made and returns to the previous screen Note Custom code buttons remain intact even when switching or creating new jobs because the details of these buttons are stored to a text file in the program s folder called NoteCode ini If you want to copy custom code buttons to another data collector you must copy this file to the same folder on the other data collector 56 Survey Pro Help 5 00 View DTM Job View DTM Before viewing a DTM the Setup DTM 3D screen will open where the DTM layers must be defined This screen is also used to define other parameters for the DTM Layers Opens the Layers for Staking DTM screen where the DTM layers are selected Boundary Opens the Choose Polyline screen where a polyline can be selected that defines the boundary of the DTM Exclude points Move any points that exist outside the selected boundary to the Auxiliary layer If a point is later stored outside the boundary they will also be moved to the Auxiliary layer Discard the boundary Initially moves any points that exist outside the boundary to th
5. Change gt Changes this screen to the No Matching Base Point display described above where you can override the point selected to match the base receiver s location lt Back Return to the previous screen Next gt Sets the base receiver to broadcast corrections in the chosen format at the specified base point location then opens the Connect to Rover screen 107 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Connect to Rover The Connect to Rover screen is used to select a rover receiver to connect to The display of the receivers to select list is identical to the Receiver Settings screen Below the list of receivers the modem type and correction format are displayed for radio modems The Network and server type are displayed for internet modems Connect gt Connects to the selected receiver and advanced to the Set Rover Receiver screen Set Rover Receiver The Set Rover Receiver screen is used to enter the rover receiver antenna and setup the rover receiver hardware Rover Receiver Displays information about the status of the receiver Antenna Type Select the antenna type to use Setup Tap to change the antenna for the base receiver See Receiver Antenna Measure To Specify the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured Enter the distance from the ground to the Measured To location Post Processing Recording Interval Sets the period for logging GNSS raw data for RTK post processing
6. Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents Traverse on Curve Curve Trav on Curve The Traverse on Curve screen will compute the PT and radius point for a curve when the tangent azimuth at a PC point is known The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Delta is the deflection angle e Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length e Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the cen
7. Next gt Tap to advance to the GNSS Resection Backsight screen if a calibration solution is required before data collection can begin Data Collection The Data Collection screen is used to collect GNSS measurements and store new points in the job GNSS Status at top of screen Displays the current solution type the data modem reception quality the number of satellites used and the horizontal precision computed by the receiver When this area is tapped the GNSS Status screen will open Point Enter the point name for the next point to be stored Desc Enter the description for the next point to be stored Set HR Displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on Set HR to open the Receiver Antenna screen Traverse Opens the Traverse Base screen Control Opens the Control Points screen Topo SS Stores a point with a single epoch of data The current position is checked against the criteria and if acceptable the point is stored Note The Topo SS function never puts the receiver in static mode so the precision of the rapid side shot will be less 112 Survey Pro Help 5 00 than a point occupied in static mode Feature Opens the Feature Collection scree
8. Sta increases the Current Station by the specified Interval 202 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Layout computes the location of the Current Station Results Station is the current station Deflection is the horizontal angle to the current station as if occupying the TS and backsighting the Spiral PI Long crd is the chord length from the TS to the current station Short crd is the chord length from the previous station to the current station Traverse on Spiral Curve Spiral The Traverse on Spiral screen is used to compute the location of and optionally store the SC or ST and spiral PI points Radius is the radius of the circular curve Length is the length along the spiral curve from TS to SC TS CS Point is the existing point associated with the TS or CS point Azimuth Bearing is the tangent direction at the TS or CS point TS gt SC specifies that the curve starts at the tangent to spiral and ends at the spiral to curve CS gt ST specifies that the curve starts at the curve to spiral and ends at the spiral to tangent Right Left specifies is the curve turns toward the right or left as you face the spiral from the TS or CS Store SC ST When checked saves a point for the computed SC point Store PI When checked saves a point for the computed spiral PI Results Tangent the tangent direction entering the spiral at the TS or CS Tangent Out the tangent direction exiting the spiral at the
9. The main map can also be placed into survey mode which allows you to collect points directly from the map Tap and hold on the main map to bring up the context menu that allows you to toggle between map view and survey map mode The controls on the active survey map are R or Th Topo Observation Takes a tracking mode observation and stores the point with the point name description and feature code if showing from the survey map controls at the bottom of the screen ih or Ki Observation Starts a standard mode observation and when the observation is accepted prompts you for all of the surveying prompts you have selected on the Surveying Settings card of the Job Settings ii or 13 Height of Rod Opens up a height of rod conventional mode or height of GNSS antenna GNSS mode prompt where you can change the current HR a4 Station Setup conventional mode Opens up the Station Setup screen where you can check or modify the current instrument setup k in GNSS Status GNSS mode Opens up the GNSS Status screen Pt Enter the point name for the next survey point to store Desc Enter the description for the next survey point to store Show Autolinework Code Controls gt Shows the Feature and linework control Show this control if you wish to add feature codes and or auto linework control codes to topo survey points Hide gt Hides the Feature and linework control When this control is hidden topo survey points will be st
10. Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the Begin Point to the End Point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Begin Point to the End Point Slope Dist is the slope distance from the Begin Point to the End Point North is the change in the Y coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point East is the change in the X coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point Elevation is the change in elevation from the Begin Point to the End Point Grade is the slope from the Begin Point to the End Point Inverse Point to Line Inverse Point to Line 177 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Inverse Point to Line screen computes the perpendicular offset distance and direction from a known point to a continuous line defined by two points or one point and a direction Inverse Point is the known point that the offset information to a specified line is computed Begin Station is the beginning station value that corresponds with the Start of Line which is used to compute the inverse station in the results Start of Line is the first point that defines the line from which the offset is computed Point Direction is the second point or known direction that defines the line from which the offset is computed Store Point When checked will store the coordinates for the point located on the specified line tangent to the offset Solve will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the spec
11. New or Edit Super Elevations The Super Elevations card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit super elevations A super elevation changes the cross slope of the first segment of a template in order to bank a curve the slope of any remaining segments will remain unadjusted One super elevation defines a begin point and an end point where the slope change begins and where it finishes the transition for one side of a road Therefore to bank a two lane road four super elevations would be required one at the beginning and one at the end of the curve for each side of the road A super elevation can either hinge at the outer edge of the first segment or at the centerline Hinging at the center results in the elevation of the outer segments to change Hinging at the edge results in the elevation of the centerline changing Because of this the software will only allow you to hinge on edge for one side of a road If the other side is also super elevated you will be forced to hinge that side at the center so that an abrupt change in elevation does not occur at the centerline Add when a super elevation or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Super Elevations card this button opens the Add Super Elevation screen which allows you to add a super elevation to the same side of the road that was selected Widenings and super elevations are always sorted in this list by their specified start stations Edit a
12. lt Note When you are doing a survey in a south west grid system the meaning of the X Y axes are reversed so the south coordinate is labeled on the X axis and the west coordinate is labeled on the Y axis Format Settings The Format Settings card defines the number of places beyond the decimal point that are displayed for various values in all screens and how stations are defined All internal calculations are performed using full precision Northings Eastings Allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for northing and easting values Elevations Allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for elevations Sq feet meters Allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for square feet or square meter values Acres Hectares Allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for acre or hectare values Distances Allows you to display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for distances Angles Allows you to include from zero to two fractional seconds with angle values Stations Allows you to display stations in any of the following formats e 12 34 123 Displays stations where the number to the left of the advances after traveling 100 feet or meters e 1 234 123 Displays stations where the number to the left of the advances after traveling 1 000 feet or meters e 1 234 123 Displays standard distances rather than s
13. Description displays the description assigned to the design point Angle Right is the horizontal angle to turn to face the design point Horz distance is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the design point Vert Distance is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the design point ZE to Rod is the zenith angle required to face the prism over the design point Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked 4 The first time Circle Zero is used during a stakeout session a dialog will appear to warn that the original backsight reference will be lost Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the first screen Stake gt opens the third and final Stake Points screen where the
14. Longitude Enter the origin longitude of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually set at the longitude of the first GNSS control point North Enter the north coordinate at the origin of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually the grid northing of the first GNSS control point East Enter the east coordinate at the origin of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually the grid easting of the first GNSS control point Origin Height Origin Scale Enter either the height or the scale factor used to reference the calibration system to 119 Survey Pro Help 5 00 ground level Same as Base Updates the values with the coordinate of the GNSS base station Use Geoid Choose to use a geoid model with this zone When this box is checked you can select a geoid model from the dropdown list to use with the coordinate system When this box is unchecked no geoid will be used with the coordinate system You can pick a geoid model from the database using the drop down box Database Opens the Select Coordinate System screen where you can pick a reference stereographic map projection zone or a solved calibration site from the coordinate system data base file csd Reset initializes a new calibration reference stereographic map projection with the input parameters Select Database Survey Projection Reset Origin Pick from Database Select Database or Survey Projection
15. PPM Enter the parts per million correction factor for measured slope distances Certain instruments use the Survey Pro application to control PPM correction if you are connected to an instrument of this type the PPM correction page will show the following controls PPM Off Use this option to disable PPM correction of measured slope distances PPM On Use this option to enable PPM correction of measured slope distances Pressure Enter the atmospheric pressure and pressure units Get Pressure if available Gets the atmospheric pressure from the barometer built into the instrument Temperature Enter the temperature and temperature units Get Temperature if available Gets the temperature from the thermometer built into the instrument Calculate Triggers the instrument to calculate the PPM correction factor from the input values PPM Enter the parts per million correction factor for measured slope distances Station Setup PPM Correction The PPM Booking screen is used to record the temperature pressure and PPM values that were set on the instrument for the case where the instrument is applying the PPM correction Note The PPM correction values entered on this page are for book keeping purposes only When PPM is being applied in the instrument the instrument will correct measured slope distances for PPM and the corrected distance is returned to Survey Pro Pressure Enter the atmospheric pressure and pressure un
16. RAW Settings Export CR5 Coordinates Export TXT Coordinates Export TXT Coordinates Format Export CSV_ Coordinate Export LandXML File Export JobXML File File Menu Index Main Index Import Control Index Import Control File Menu Index Main Index Backup amp Restore Index Backup Restore Job Backup Restore Archive Properties Backup Restore Backup Backup Restore Create a Snapshot Backup Restore Restore File Menu Index Main Index Open New File Open New The Open New screen is used to open a recent job or create a new one This screen also appears when the software is first started Open opens the job selected in the Open a Recent Job list Browse will open the Open screen where an existing job to open can be selected New will open the New screen where a new job can be created 6 Survey Pro Help 5 00 New Job File Open New New The New Job screen is used to create a new job Create a New Job File Name Screen Directory displays the directory where the current job will be stored Job Name is where the name of the new job is entered The default name is the current date Browse allows you to select a different directory where to store the new job Current Settings displays the last used settings for creating a job These settings will be used to create a new job when you tap Create Job Now Create Job Now creates a new job with the
17. Tap to read the circle from the instrument Send Circle Sends the entered Backsight Circle to the instrument Next gt Advances to the Check Setup page This button shows up when you are using check backsight as part of the station setup work flow Finish Records the setup and exits the wizard This button only shows up when you have Skip Check during Station Setup checked on the Surveying card of the Job Settings pages Station Setup Known Point Orient Instrument BS Azimuth BS Azimuth Enter the azimuth to the known azimuth reference mark Read Circle Tap to read the circle from the instrument Send Circle Sends the entered Backsight Circle to the instrument Next gt Advances to the Check Setup page This button shows up when you are using check backsight as part of the station setup work flow Finish Records the setup and exits the wizard This button only shows up when you have Skip Check during Station Setup checked on the Surveying card of the Job Settings pages Station Setup Resection The following screens are used when the setup type is set to Unknown Point Resection Station Setup Resection Enter Store Point Store Pt Enter the name for the new point to be stored as a result of the resection Description Enter the description of the new point to be stored as a result of the resection HI Enter the height of instrument if you are doing a 3D survey 2D Survey Check this box to conduct a 2D
18. This routine is identical to the Export TXT Coordinates routine described above with the exception that the formatting for the exported file is automatically set to comma delimited and the extension for the file name will be CSV Export LandXML XML File The LandXML export routine allows you to export points along with polylines and alignments Export polylines and alignments will export the points in the current project as well as any polylines and alignments If this is unchecked only the points will be exported Export polylines on the specified layer as parcels will export the polylines on the selected layer as parcels Polylines on other layers will still be exported only not as parcels Export point description as allows you to select to export the point descriptions as LandXML descriptions or codes Export JobXML JXL File The JobXML export routine will export points coordinate system and all survey raw observation data from the job to a JobXML file Import Control File Import Control This screen is used to select a Survey Pro file survey JOB to import control point coordinates Import opens up the file browse dialog where you can select a Survey Pro version 5 survey or a Survey Pro version 4 JOB file to import control coordinates into the current job Backup Restore Job Survey Pro Help 5 00 File Backup Restore The Backup Restore wizard consists of a series of screens that ar
19. To From provides point selection by entering point names Store Point When checked will store the first solution where a perpendicular offset intersects with a polyline using the specified point name If additional solutions are found the following solutions will be stored using consecutive 178 Survey Pro Help 5 00 point names Solve will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the polyline Note There is no solution if a perpendicular offset does not occur within the extents of any selected polyline segments Results Station is the station along the polyline where the offset occurs starting from the Begin station Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset Offset is indicates if the Inverse Point is located to the right left or on the specified line as you occupy the beginning of the polyline and face the end Segment Type shows if the segment is a line arc or spiral Beg Pt if applicable this is the first point selected that defines a line End Pt if applicable this is the second point selected that defines a line Inverse Point to Multiple Points Inverse Multiple Points The Inverse Point to Multiple Points screen will calculate the distance and direction from an existing point to one or more other points Inverse point is the reference point used to compute the distance and direction to the other points Tap Points provides a map view where
20. in horizontal distance Red arrow up GO larger than 0 3 meters or foot in horizontal distance Brown triangle plus sign FILL that is the point shot is below the Design point Blue triangle minus sign CUT that is the point shot is above the Design point Operating Quick Stake Prerequisites Open a job Make sure that backsight and occupying have been solved 1 Pick a design point Enter the point tap the map button to pick it from a map or select the map from the drop down list 2 Turn to the design point Turn the instrument to the angle as its reading counts down to zero degree If the instrument has servo motors built in tap the Turn To Line icon 94 Survey Pro Help 5 00 3 Tap the MSR key to measure to the rod Quick Stake goes into COME GO LEFT RIGHT mode and shows a CUT FILL 4 Store the staked point Tap Enter or the stake icon You are prompted to store the point as a new point A description defaults based on one of the following selections o Design point s description o PT and the design point name 5 Stake Next exit When you have stored the point a new design point is already entered into the Design Point field and ready to be staked The dialog has already been changed from COME GO LEFT RIGHT CUT FILL to ANGLE TO TURN TO DISTANCE Stakeout settings To change the stakeout settings tap the Settings icon Live update fields This option enables you to update fields automa
21. is the Left and Right width of the road respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment X Slope is the Left and Right slope of the road respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment calculated from rise run x 100 Note A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of payment Stake Curb Ditch When checked a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement Height is the height of the curb or ditch in feet or meters A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch Offset From Edge of Road is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement Note The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Store Offset Points Screen 3 The third Store Offset Points screen is used to define which offset points will be stored From Station is the station where the stored offset points will begin To Station is the station where the stored offset points will end 160 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Station Interval is the distance between the stations where offset points are stored Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen offset points will also be stored where ever the horizontal or vertical section of the road changes Start Point is the point number
22. Converts x in radians to decimal degrees R gt G Converts x in radians to Grads R gt P Converts the rectangular coordinates y x to polar coordinates dms Adds x in degrees minutes seconds and y in degrees minutes seconds Manage Pictures Job Manage Pictures The Manage Pictures screen is used to manage pictures that are associated with the current job The list of pictures is sorted by the picture names by default but they can also be sorted by point association date or file size by tapping the desired column s heading For example tap Date to sort all the pictures by date Tapping Date again will reverse the sort order Various icons are used to indicate the type of point the corresponding pictures is associated with View Opens the selected picture in the Windows Mobile Pictures amp Video application Tap ok to return to the software Additional options are available from the Send and Menu buttons but are not related to the software and are not covered in this manual Del Deletes the selected picture Take Pictures Job Take Picture The Take Picture routine is only available on a Nomad or Ranger 3 with a built in camera The routine is used to take a new picture and optionally associate it with an existing point Align the shot in the first Take Still Picture screen and when ready press Enter on the data collector to take the picture The picture will be displayed on the second scre
23. Laser Pointer Tracklight Toggle between using the laser pointer or tracklight Lock Toggle the prism lock state Close Tap to exit the application 91 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Job mode Once you have opened a job you can e Perform station setup e Go to stakeout mode e Store sideshot or traverse shots or angle offset shots HA Horizontal angle ZA Vertical angle SD or HD VD Current shot is bold until it is stored as a point Non bold values cannot be stored and the user is prompted to take a new shot Note SD or HD VD from a shot initiated by the MSR2 key is prefaced with The icons on the screen are used as follow Station setup There are three options e Stakeout Launches the Quick Stake dialog e Station Setup Launches the Station Setup wizard e Check Station Launches the Check Setup dialog Turn to Appears if the instrument supports motorized turning There are two options e Turn To Launch the Turn To dialog e Flip Change the face of the instrument Search Appears if the instrument supports auto lock There are three options e Search Find a prism and lock onto it e LockNGo Lock onto a prism and follow it e Stop Stop tracking prism Store Sideshot There are two options e Sideshot Store the currently displayed data as a sideshot and invalidate the distance e Traverse Store the currently displayed data as a traverse shot and invalidate the distance Laser Pointer
24. Leica total stations only HR is the default HR for the Smart Target Add Offset to HR when checked the offset entered will always automatically be added to the HR entered for the Smart Target Prism Constant is the prism constant for the Smart Target Note If a prism constant is entered for a Smart Target while a prism constant is also set in the total station the prism constant will be applied twice resulting in incorrect distance measurements for every shot Be sure the prism constant is set to zero in the total station if entering a value for a Smart Target or vice versa Use RMT Check this box when using a remote target and specify the ID used by the prism in the associated box This option is only available when using a total station and prism that supports target IDs Using Active Prism Check this option when using an active prism This option is only available when using a total station that supports active prisms 231 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note In order to perform automatic repetitions when using active prisms active prisms must be set up over both the backsight and foresight 232 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Appendix Menu Transverse Mercator Zones Lambert Zones Main Index Transverse Mercator Zones Central Meridians for State Plane Coordinates E East W West C Central Central Meridian 5 50 730 42 00 46 00 50 00 54 00 1155 13 45 525 1 00 2 00 2 10 410
25. Off Base Rover or Post Processing mode Memory Displays the amount of memory remaining in the receiver s internal storage card Battery Displays the remaining battery charge in the receiver Satellites Displays the number of satellites e Used By the receiver for the current GPS solution e Locked Tracked by the receiver Reset Ambiguities Used to reinitialize the receiver s RTK engine Solution Displays the type and quality of solution It will be one of the following values No Communication Not receiving a response to commands e No Data Receiving an unknown or a bad response to commands e No RTK Solution Receiving a response but the receiver is not computing a solution e Autonomous Receiving a stand alone solution accuracy is about 100 meters e Code The receiver is calculating a code differential solution precision is about 1 to 10 meters e Float The receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution with float ambiguities precision is typically within 0 1 m to 0 5 m Network Float The receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution using NTRIP network corrections with float ambiguities precision is typically within 0 1 m to 0 5 m e Fixed The receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution with fixed ambiguities precision is typically within 15 mm e Network Fixed The receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution using NTRIP network
26. Offset Points screen is used to store points at a specified perpendicular offset to an existing polyline alignment or point range Points can be stored that correspond with the nodes of an alignment points of a polyline and or at a specified station interval Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the offset points will be computed from To From allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the offset will be computed from Offset defines the offset distance and which side the offset occurs The right or left side is referenced from the first point that defines the selected line Store Pts When checked will store the offset points that are computed based on the selected line and which of the two following checkboxes are checked Note Leaving the Store Pts field unchecked and solving the screen will result in a map screen that displays the points that would be stored but without actually storing anything to the job This is useful for testing the routine before storing information Store Nodes When checked computes offset points that correspond to each node in the selected alignment points where the horizontal or vertical alignment change or that correspond to the existing points in a selected line or point range Sta Intervals When checked computes offset points from the beginning of the selected line or point range and at each specified station interval along the line or
27. Pro Help 5 00 Horizontal Angle Offset Survey Horizontal Angle Offset The Horizontal Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that cannot be occupied such as at the center of large tree The routine shoots a prism positioned at the side of the new point and then reads the horizontal angle when aiming toward the center of the new point to compute the new point s location Foresight The point name that will be used when storing the new point Description The description for the offset shot that is stored Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen Aim Center Record the horizontal angle from the total station which should be facing the center of the new point Shoot Prism Take a shot to the prism which is located at the side of the new point F A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Note The new point will have the same elevation as the point occupied by the prism Note The prism only needs to occupy the location at the side of the new point A prism is not necessary when shooting the location directly in front of the new point Vertical Angle Offset Survey Vertical Angle Offset The Vertical Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that exists directly above or below the rod location but cannot be occupied such as the top of a utility pole The new point will have the same coordinates as the rod location but with a diff
28. Results Occupy Point Displays the name of the point to be stored at the occupy location as a result of the resection Description Displays the description of the point to be stored at the occupy location as a result of the resection North East Elevation Displays the coordinate to be stored for the occupy point Solution Angular RMS Displays the root mean squared of the angular measurements used in the resection Solution Distance RMS Displays the root mean squared error of the distance measurements used in the resection Store gt Stores the point and advances to the Station Setup wizard in BS Point mode where you can complete the station setup for the newly stored occupy point Station Setup Use Last The following screens are used when the setup type is set to Use Last Station Setup Use Last Enter HI HI Enter the height of instrument if you are doing a 3D survey Check Setup This button is only available when there is already a station setup in place Tap Check Setup to open the Station Check screen Next gt Advances to the Station Setup Use Last Send Circle Page Station Setup Use Last Send Circle 71 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Fixed Target Roving Target Select the target type at the backsight point Choose fixed target if you will use a dedicated target at the backsight Choose Roving Target if you will use the same target at the backsight as you will for foresight points HR Enter the height o
29. Select the type of backsight used to orient the instrument You can choose between New Point BS Point BS Azimuth Station Setup Known Point Orient Instrument New Point BS Azimuth BS Bearing Enter the azimuth or bearing to the new backsight point Backsight Circle Enter the circle reading you would like to set on the backsight line Read Circle Tap to read the circle from the instrument Send Circle Sends the entered Backsight Circle to the instrument Fixed Target Roving Target Select the target type at the backsight point Choose fixed target if you will use a dedicated target at the backsight Choose Roving Target if you will use the same target at the backsight as you will for foresight points HR Enter the height of the backsight target Measure Backsight Triggers a measurement from the total station and stores the new backsight point Finish Records the setup and exits the wizard 69 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Station Setup Known Point Orient Instrument BS Point BS Point Enter the point name to use for the backsight point BS Azimuth Displays the grid direction to the backsight point Fixed Target Roving Target Select the target type at the backsight point Choose fixed target if you will use a dedicated target at the backsight Choose Roving Target if you will use the same target at the backsight as you will for foresight points HR Enter the height of the backsight target Read Circle
30. Set it to Off to disable post processing data collection Finish Tap to open the Data Collection screen You can finish on this screen if the coordinate system and any required calibration are already solved Next gt Tap to advance to the GNSS Resection Backsight screen if a calibration solution is required before data collection can begin GNSS Resection Backsight The GNSS Resection Backsight screen is used to collect control points required to setup and solve the coordinate system before you can collect data with valid local coordinates GNSS Resection This screen is called GNSS Resection when you have set the base on a new point The number of control points required to solve the calibration is displayed Occupy Control gt Opens the Occupy Control Setup screen When you have occupied enough control to solve the calibration the Check GNSS Resection Backsight screen opens Start Now Solves a temporary calibration which allows you to collect data before the calibration is fully solved then opens the Data Collection screen You must collect the required number of control at some point in order to get valid local coordinates for your GNSS data collected points GNSS Backsight This screen is called GNSS Backsight when you have set the base on an existing point The number of control points required to solve the calibration is displayed Occupy Control gt Opens the Occupy Control Setup screen When you have occupie
31. Software Index On board builds of the Survey Pro software have enhanced features to take advantage of the platform Quick Shot routine Quick Stake routine Live Update fields MSR MSR2 key support Survey Menu Index Main Index Station Setup Survey Station Setup The Station Setup wizard is used to set the occupy point and orient the instrument PPM Correction If you have Prompt for PPM set on the Survey Settings card then you start your station setup on the PPM Correction screen Setup Type Select the type of setup to do with this wizard You can choose from Known Point Unknown Point Resection and Use Last Setup Station Setup PPM Correction 67 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The following screens are used to setup PPM correction parameters for the station setup Apply PPM In Instrument Use this option if you set the instrument to apply the PPM correction In this case the distances returned to Survey Pro by the instrument have already been corrected for PPM Record PPM values to file Opens up the PPM Booking screen where you can record the temperature and pressure values entered into the instrument for book keeping purposes Apply PPM In Survey Pro Use this option if you set the instrument to 0 PPM correction and you want to have Survey Pro correct measured slope distances for PPM Pressure Enter the atmospheric pressure and pressure units Temperature Enter the temperature and temperature units
32. Survey Pro Help 5 00 Angle is the angle to be added to the specified azimuth or bearing thus modifying the direction to the new point Note To subtract an angle from the specified azimuth or bearing enter a negative Angle value Horiz Dist is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the reference point to the new point Store point When this is checked the computed point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the location for the new point and access the next screen Define a Location Screen 2 The second Define a Location screen displays the direction and distance information from the occupy point to the new point Ref Point is the reference point specified in the From Point field in the previous screen Description is the description for the reference point From Instrument to Location displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the new point Users would aim their non robotic total station the direction specified here Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The
33. Survey Pro Help 5 00 gt X Y View gt X Z View Map card Changes the orientation of the current view Quick Shot routine Opens when you start the software or when you press the STAR key from anywhere in the application This includes the following e No Job mode Job mode e Quick Shot Settings e Shell to external mode No Job mode On starting Survey Pro On board the No Job Mode screen appears You can e Take measurements but not store points e Change instrument settings e Allow for the setting of circle HA Horizontal angle ZA Vertical angle SD or HD VD Bold for current shot for 3 seconds to show the shot is new then normal to show the data is old Note SD or HD VD from a shot initiated by the MSR2 key is prefaced with The icons on the screen are used as follow Circle Select one of the following e Circle 0 The horizontal angle is set to 0 You are prompted to accept e Circle Az You are prompted for the new horizontal angle reading The instrument is set to this reading Turn to Appears if the instrument supports motorized turning There are two options Turn To Launch the Turn To screen e Flip Change the face of the instrument Search Appears if the instrument supports auto lock There are three options Search Find a prism and lock onto it e LockNGo Lock onto a prism and follow it e Stop Stop tracking prism Open New Opens the Open New Job screen
34. The third example describes a curve with a radius of 100 using the same units as the job that begins at Point 7 turning to the Left from the point of view of the radius point creating a Large arc gt 180 and ending at Point 9 Map Display Options From the Map View tap The Map Display Options screen is used to configure the information that is displayed in the Map View Show Points will show a dot for each point in view Smart Point Labels displays only certain point labels name and description when many points are grouped together to reduce clutter Names will show the point name for each point that is in view Descriptions will show the point description for each point in view Show Lines will show all the polylines that are on the DTM layer Show Basemaps will display any basemaps selected for the current job Show Only This Layer When checked will show only the selected point data that exists on the specified layer When unchecked point data from all layers is displayed Manage Layers opens the Manage Layers screen where the layers can be configured Manage Basemaps opens the Manage Basemaps screen where basemaps can be added to the current job Save as Default Display Options When checked will save the selections made to this screen as the default selections Map View Many screens in Survey Pro have a map view Map views have a common set of controls described below from the command bar
35. This is where the templates are added to the alignment and any widenings and super elevations are defined All existing roads are listed in this screen If an existing road is selected the overhead and profile view of that road are also displayed New Opens the New Road screen where a new road can be defined Edit Opens the Edit Road screen where the selected road can be edited The Edit Road screen is identical to the New Road screen Delete Opens the following prompts to delete the selected road s Are you sure you want to delete the selected Roads Answering Yes to this prompt will disassociate the selected road s from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Add Edit Roads screen In this case the road can still be re associated with the Import routine Answering No to this prompt will return you to the Add Edit Roads screen without making any changes Delete alignment alignment name Answering Yes to this prompt will delete the selected alignment s from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Edit Alignments screen In this case the alignment can be re associated with the Import routine from the definition in the RDS file Answering No to this prompt will open the next prompt without deleting the selected alignment s from the current job Delete Roadname RD5 file Answering Yes to this prompt will permanently delete the selected alignments and road RDS files from t
36. To screen where the total station can be turned to a specified direction or quickly flipped between face one and face two EDM Mode Allows you to select from various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Results Displays the Results card Map Displays the Map card Aim Displays the Aim card Foresight Displays the Foresight card S The satellite icon in the Command Bar indicates the status of the satellite connection when using GeoLock Tapping this icon will display a pop up list with the following items e Sky Plot Opens the Sky Plot screen Settings Opens the GeoLock Settings screen e Reset Resets the GPS localization solution e Sats An output only field that will display one of the following messages which will change along with the color of the satellite icon GREEN On Ready GeoLock is active and a localization solution exists YELLOW On Collecting Data GeoLock is active but a localization solution does not yet exist RED No GPS Data or GeoLock requires Backsight set No NMEA data is available or the backsight has not yet been 87 Survey Pro Help 5 00 set GRAY Off GeoLock is not enabled Results Card Survey Remote Control Results The Results card displays live angle data from the total station and live distance data is displayed depending on the
37. allows you to move the selected points to the elevation entered into the elevation edit field Note You can only change the elevation of multiple points if all of the points in the selection are derived from user input key in or imported If any of the points in the selection are derived from observations the Location card will not be displayed Edit Point Job Edit Points Edit The Edit Point screen is used to modify point properties There are three cards on the Edit Point screen e General Edit Point General Card Location Edit Point Location Card e Feature Edit Point Feature Card Edit Point General Job Edit Points Edit General The General card of the Edit Point screen is used to modify the description layer and picture information for the selected point Point Name Displays the selected point s name Description The description for the selected point Layer The layer for the selected point 44 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note Only user entered points key in or imported can be assigned as control points If the point selected for editing is derived from a measurement then you will not see the Control layer in the layer edit box Picture Displays a list of pictures associated with a point You can click the drop down list to see the pictures associated with the job Use the Power button to view or delete any of the pictures associated with a point Use the camera button to open the c
38. at the current station V Map Card The V Map card displays a graphic of the cross sectional profile of the road at the current station The hinge points and slopes are also displayed Slopes Card The Slopes card is used to specify the cut and fill slopes that will be used when computing the location of the catch point The default values are the slopes stored in the template for the section being staked To override a default slope check the appropriate box and key in the new slope The new slope entered will always be used regardless of the values stored in the templates Changes to slopes will be reflected in the V Map card graphic Cut Slope is the left and right slope respectively used when the terrain requires a cut the hinge point is located below the terrain s surface Fill Slope is the left and right slope respectively used when the terrain requires a fill the hinge point is located above the terrain s surface Cut Fill Hinge Points Cards The Fill Hinge Points tab and the Cut Hinge Points tab are used to select the segment where you want the hinge point location to be computed from in situations requiring a fill or a cut respectively The hinge point will occur at the node of the selected segment furthest from the centerline The hinge point can also be defined at different segments for the left and right sides of the road Left Right is the specified left and right segment respectively to compute the hinge poi
39. be located Slope Staking Offset Stake The following screen is only accessed if you choose to stake a point at a specified offset away from the catch point Station displays the current station being slope staked Offset from CP is the offset from the catch point specified in the previous screen From Instrument to Design Point displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point 150 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen Point Slope Staking Stakeout Point Slope Stak
40. can enter the name of a point to search for in the records e Find Next Point Searches for the next reference to the point name selected by the Find Point screen You can tap and hold on selected records to open up a screen to edit that specific record The following records can be edited e Conventional Setup Opens up the Edit Station Setup screen Conventional Target Opens up the Edit Target screen e GNSS Base Setup Opens up the Edit GNSS Base screen GNSS Antenna Opens up the Edit GNSS Antenna screen You can tap and hold on any record to attach a note to this specific record You can also append a note to the end of the file by tapping the Note button Note Opens the Raw Data Note screen Time Appends the current date and time in the form of a note to the end of the raw data records Raw Data Find Point Job View Raw Data Find Point The Raw Data Find Point screen allows you to enter an existing point name to search for in the raw data records Point Enter the name of the point to search for Raw Data Edit Station Job View Raw Data Edit Station The Raw Data Edit Station screen allows you to edit the conventional station setup Occupy Point Enter the occupy point for this station setup Note If you wish to change the station setup point you can only choose a user entered point key in or imported as the new station point for this setup If you wish to use a point derived f
41. chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii 194 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents Compute Radius Point Curve Radius Point The Compute Radius Point screen is used to compute and optionally store the radius point for a curve when certain parts of the curve are known PC Point is the point that defines the beginning of the curve Point of Curvature PT Point is the point that defines the end of the curve Point of Tangency Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC Arc specifies if the arc is Small less than 180 or Large greater than 180 The final part of the curve is defined by one of the following choices e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft c
42. control fully robotic total stations from a remote data collector 86 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note The remote control functions are available only after a supported robotic total station is selected and enabled in the Instrument Settings screen The Remote Control screen allows you to turn the total station in any direction using the arrow buttons on the keypad and control the tacking functions The arrow keys are typically used to get the total station to aim in the general vicinity of the prism prior to initiating a search The total station will continue to turn in the direction of the button as long as the button remains pressed Aims the scope upward v Aims the scope downward gt Turns the scope to the right as you face the total station from the data collector lt Turns the scope to the left GeoLock This button is available when GeoLock is enabled and when a supported total station has lost lock on the prism Tapping it will turn the total station to the area of the prism computed by the GPS solution followed by a prism search See the User s Manual for more information on using GeoLock Search Starts the search routine where the total station searches in a specific pattern until it sees the prism and then stops Lock Puts the total station in track mode where it will track the movements of the prism Stop Stops the total station from tracking or searching Turn To Opens the Turn
43. direct reflectorless Shoot Line Prompts you to take two shots on a line that intersects with the point you want to store Note Each shot can be in any location on the line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 Aim at Corner Prompts you to aim at the corner the point that you want to store Although no shot is taken the angles to the point will be used to compute its location Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where you can set and check your station occupy point and backsight Corner amp Offset Survey Corner amp Offset The Corner and Offset screen is used to store a point using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot be shot directly but the offset s to the point can be measured from a reference line that can be shot Foresight The name of the point that will be stored Description The description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 Shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Horiz Offset The horizontal distance on the line from Shot 1 to the new point Select L if the new point falls to the left of Shot 1 or select R if it falls to the right Perpendicular Offset The horizontal distance perpendicular to the reference line from the line
44. in RTK data collection routines e Allow in PPK Survey Select to allow storing of autonomous points when in an RTK survey that is also storing PPK data to a post processing file Session Monitor Select to use the session monitoring thresholds when collecting data with the Static Rover Session screen To have the software display warnings during post processing data collection check Warn me if and specify threshold values for the number of SV HDOP and memory Units Settings The Units Settings card defines the units that are used within the software sent from the total station entered from the keypad and displayed on the screen You can select the following settings for your project from the following dropdown lists Units for Distances Defines the units used for length as Meters International Feet or US Survey Feet Display Feet Inches Allows you to view distances in feet and inches Available only if the current distance is International Feet or US Feet If selected you can then choose the required fractions of an inch 2 4 8 16 32 64 Note You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job by appending the distance value with the following characters for ft or ift International Feet e usf or usft US Survey Feet e ior in Inches m Meters e cm Centimeters mm Millimeters e cor ch Chains Once the cursor leaves that field the distance will be converted a
45. in Stakeout Settings the location where the stationing change occurs is considered a corner and will be included as you advance 218 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Adjust Menu The Adjust Menu contains routines to perform a variety of adjustments Scale Translate Rotate Traverse Adjust Index Main Index Traverse Adjust Index Traverse Adjust Traverse Adjust Angle Adjustment Traverse Adjust Compass Rule Traverse Adjust Results Adjust Menu Index Main Index Scale Adjust Scale The Scale screen will scale the distances of a range of points relative to a specified base point This is useful to correct a survey where a scale factor was inadvertently applied during data collection Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view To From allows you to select points by typing in a point range Base point The distances to all the selected points will be scaled relative to this point The coordinates for the base point will not change Scale factor is the scale factor that is applied to the distances from the base point to the selected points Include Elevation in Adjustment When checked the elevations to the selected points will also be adjusted by the scale factor relative to the Base point Solve will perform the adjustment on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly Translate Adjust Translate The Translate screen will move a group a points hori
46. in the upper portion of the screen to selected record or to the end of the raw data records in the job Code Page The Code page lists the default line work command code buttons and or customized buttons Tapping any button will enter the text associated with that button to the upper portion of the screen Customize Toggles the page between normal mode and customize mode When in customize mode any of the default line work command buttons can be customized or new buttons created Default only available after tapping Customize Restores the default contents of the Code page Any customized buttons will be lost History Page The History page provides a quick way to enter a note that was used earlier The page lists up to the last 30 notes used Notes that were entered from the buttons on the Code page are excluded from this list to reduce clutter since those notes are already easily accessible Sort Allows you to sort the list of previous notes using a variety of methods Select Copies the note currently selected from the list into the upper portion of the screen where it can then be appended to the raw data file using the Write Now button xl Removes the selected note from the list Code Edit Job View Raw Data Note Code Customize click a button Tapping any of the 16 available buttons while in customize mode will open the contents of that button in the Code Edit screen where it can be modified as desired
47. is located Note Each shot can be in any location on the same plane but they must not form a straight line and they should not be grouped close together Aim at Corner Prompts you to aim at the corner the point that you want to store Although no shot is taken the angles to the point will be used to compute its location Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen you can set and check your station occupy point and backsight Shoot From Two Ends Survey Shoot From 2 Ends The Shoot From 2 Ends screen is used observe a traverse leg from both ends to eliminate the effects of curvature and refraction The routine requires that a foresight point is shot but it is not stored until after it is occupied and another shot is taken to the previous occupy point The coordinates for the foresight point are computed from an average of data gathered at each occupy point Note Because the shoot from two ends procedure eliminates the effects of earth curvature and refraction the individual observations from each end are not reduced with the curvature and refraction parameter set on the Surveying Settings card Instead curvature and refraction are eliminated by averaging the observations from both ends of the traverse leg Foresight The name given to the next stored poin
48. map view which provides zoom controls Where is Next Point Stakeout Where is Next Point The instructions for the Where is Next Point routine for GNSS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Reference Manual for details 176 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Inverse Menu The Inverse Menu contains routines that compute the direction and distance between two objects The following screens are available from the Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Point Inverse Point to Line Inverse Point to Polyline Inverse Point to Multiple Points Inverse Point to Location Point Main Index Inverse Point to Point Inverse Point to Point The Inverse Point to Point screen will calculate the distance and direction between two existing points Begin Point is the reference point used to compute the distance and direction to the End Point End Point is the point whose relationship to the Begin Point is computed Select from Map allows you to quickly select both the Begin Point and End Point from a map view The first point tapped is entered as the Begin Point and the second as the End Point Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Begin Point to the End Point Results Azimuth is the azimuth from the Begin Point to the End Point
49. name of the stored point Desc The description of the stored point Location N The Y coordinate of the stored point Location E The X coordinate of the stored point Location Z The elevation of the stored point Traverse Now Before taking a shot with the Traverse button the Traverse Now screen will open where you can choose to take a new observation as your traverse point or you can choose among any of the observations already taken from this station setup as your traverse point Measure and Traverse Now This option will trigger the instrument to take a new observation and then open the Traverse Wizard to guide you through moving the station setup to the forward point Traverse to an Existing Point Shows a list of points already observed from this station setup Select any point from the list and then tap Pick a point and Traverse To opens the Traverse Wizard to guide you through moving the station setup to the forward point Traverse Wizard 73 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Survey Traverse Sideshot Traverse Traverse Now This wizard is used to setup the occupy point and backsight after a traverse observation Note If you have Prompt for PPM turned on in the Survey Settings the the Traverse Wizard will start with the PPM Setup screen HI Enter the height of the instrument at the new setup point New Occupy Point Displays the name of the traverse to point This would be the name of the point you shot wi
50. of a robotic reflectorless total station to automatically take a sequence of shots of a surface PC software can then use the data to generate a 3 D raster image of the surface or a DTM surface to compute volume information Consult the User s Manual for more information on performing a surface scan Select Type of Surface Scan Select the type of surface scan to perform here The option selected will determine how you will define your perimeter and distance intervals Distance Grid Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Are the point names that will be used when storing the upper left upper right and lower points that define the surface perimeter 89 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note If any points defining your perimeter already exist the point names can be entered in these fields without re shooting them Shoot 1 Shoot 2 Shoot 3 Shoots and stores the corresponding point Horizontal Distance Interval The horizontal distance between each shot taken during the surface scan Vertical Distance Interval The vertical distance between each shot taken during the surface scan Angle Grid gt HA ZA gt Point Allows you to define the corners of your perimeter by taking a shot to measure the horizontal and zenith angles to each corner or enter them in by hand or by selecting existing points from the current job respectively Horizontal Angle Interval The horizontal angle that will be turned between each shot taken during the surf
51. of the curb or ditch lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen 3 Station to Stake is the station that will be staked next Station Interval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Station button is pressed Next Station advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node that falls within the interval Fill Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill Cut Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut Segment Fill HP when the terrain requires a fill you have the option to compute the hinge point from either side of the second segment The option to use segment 1 can simplify the situation where a ditch meets an area requiring a fill which would otherwise result in an area with two similar or identical negative slopes lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake CP gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen 4 The fourth screen is used to perform the actual slope staking shots Left Right displays if a Cut or Fill slope is being computed and if it is on the Left or Right side of
52. or A from various screens Tip You can pan around your map by dragging your finger or stylus across the screen E Zoom Extents Button will change the scale of the screen so that all the points in the current job will fit on the screen Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 Zoom Out Button will zoom the current screen out by approximately 25 226 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Zoom Window Button allows you to drag a box across the screen When your finger or stylus leaves the screen the map will zoom to the box that was drawn Zoom To Point Button prompts you for a point name and then the map view will be centered to the specified point with the point label displayed in red Turn To Point Button Tap this button and then tap a point in the map view to automatically turn the total station to the selected point This is only available when a robotic total station is selected and Remote Control is active in the Instrument Settings Increase Vertical Scale is only available when viewing a vertical profile Each time it is tapped the vertical scale of the view is increased Decrease Vertical Scale is only available when viewing a vertical profile Each time it is tapped the vertical scale of the view is decreased Zoom Preview Button will display only the points that are currently in use E2lMap Display Options opens the Map Display Options screen described below Manage Basemaps opens the Manage B
53. or open traverse Choose Your Traverse is used to select a traverse to adjust from the following options Tap Polyline is used to tap an existing polyline from a map view To From provides selection of points by point name Angle Adjust When checked will perform an angle adjustment to the closed traverse An angle adjustment will apply the angular error equally among all of the angles of the closed traverse and adjust the coordinates for all but the first two traverse points The first leg of the traverse is not adjusted Compass Rule When checked will perform a compass rule adjustment on the selected traverse Adjust elevation when selected the elevations for the traverse points are also adjusted from the compass rule adjustment Next gt opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard Traverse Adjust Angle Adjustment If an angle adjustment is being performed this screen will appear next Closing Angle is the closing angle for the traverse which must be represented as an angle right as shown below Next gt opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard Traverse Adjust Compass Rule If a compass rule adjustment is being performed this screen will appear next 221 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Closed Traverse select this option if you are adjusting a closed traverse Close to Known Location select this option if you are adjusting an open traverse and closing to a known point or location
54. or_Connect to Receiver Add Receiver You can set up a receiver automatically or manually Start Epoch Scan gt Tap to open the Epoch Scan dialog This automatically starts a scan that searches for all EPOCH receivers in the area and configures them When the scan is complete tap Save All to save all the receivers scanned and return to the GNSS Receivers tab or the Connection prompt Tap Rescan to repeat the scan Start Manual Setup gt Tap to open the Start Manual Setup dialog You can now set up the receiver profile manually see below Use this option to configure any brand of receiver for serial or Bluetooth communication When the scan is complete tap Save to save the setup For manual setup complete the screen Brand The brand of this receiver Model The model of this receiver Bluetooth Serial Select the communication mode for this receiver If you select Bluetooth continue as follows Bluetooth Device Select the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth Device list If your receiver is not in the list tap 25 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Settings Launches the Windows Bluetooth application Enables you to create a Bluetooth profile for your receiver If you select Serial continue as follows Port The data collector port used to communicate with the receiver Baud Rate The baud rate used by the data collector for receiver communications Parity The parity used by the dat
55. point calibration setup Geodetic Coordinates Displays the geodetic coordinates measured at the current local point Solution Quality Displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GNSS Status screen Control Point Select if the current point is to be used for Horizontal control and or Vertical control by tapping the appropriate checkboxes Session Time Displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status Displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap Accept while the number of epochs is averaged in the software Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver GNSS Status Opens the GNSS Status screen 116 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Accept Adds the measured GNSS coordinates to the point record in the job file and returns to the Control Points screen Resume Survey Survey Resume Survey Available only when in RTK GNSS mode and a survey is in session The Resume Survey routine is used to continue with a survey that has been interrupted Resume Survey Tap to open the Connect to Rover screen where you must select your RTK rover to connect to Once the connection t
56. point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the fourth Stake Line and Offset screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view Click here to view a summary of the Stake Line and Offset screens Screen Summary Screen is used to define the primary line used to determine the location of the line to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point Screen 2 is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen 3 provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked 154 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Screen 4 is used to stake the current station Stake Curve and Offset Stakeout Curve and offset The Stake Curve and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a curve or at an offset to it at fixed station intervals PC Point is the starting point of the curve point of curvature PC Tangent Azm PC Tangent Brg defines the azimuth or bearing respectively of the tangent at the PC Point Radius Degree Arc Degree Chord defines the radius degree arc or degree chord of the curve respectively Turn defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right from the point of view of the PC Begin Stat
57. point range Description is the description that will be assigned to all points that are stored Solve computes the offset points and stores them if the Store Pts checkbox is checked Station Offset Cogo Station Offset The Station Offset screen will compute and optionally store a point at a specified station and offset to an existing polyline or alignment The elevation for the stored point will always be set to the elevation of the first node of the 183 Survey Pro Help 5 00 polyline or alignment Start Station is the station for the first node of the selected line Station is the station on the line where you want to compute an offset point from Offset is the offset distance that is to the left when L is selected or right when R is selected from the selected line Store Pts When checked will store the computed offset point with the name specified in the corresponding field Tap Line opens a window where any polyline or alignment in the current job can be selected To From opens a window where a new line can be defined by entering a range of points Solve computes the location of the offset point and optionally stores the point Corner Angle Cogo Corner Angle The Corner Angle screen provides information on the horizontal angle created from three known points Backsight is an end point of the angle to be solved Middle Point is the corner point of the angle to be solved Foresig
58. points If you have more than 15 GNSS control points the 110 Survey Pro Help 5 00 blunder detection cannot run and you will see the yellow warning for your calibration solution status You must evaluate the quality of the solution manually if this is the case Start Survey at Rover Survey Start Survey When you are starting a survey at the RTK rover either because the RTK base is already set or because you are using an NTRIP network for base corrections select the Start Survey menu item You will first be prompted to select a receiver with the Connect to Rover screen Connect to Rover The Connect to Rover screen is used to select a rover receiver to connect to and to pick the format for base radio corrections or to pick the Network for internet corrections The display of the receivers to select list is identical to the Receiver Settings screen Below the list of receivers the modem type of the selected receiver and settings for that modem type are displayed For Broadcasting Radio Modems Correction Format Select the correction format of the base receiver broadcast The formats available will depend on your brand and model Use CMR Station Index Set a CMR station index if you are using a CMR type correction format For Internet Modems Select Network Is where you select the network to use When you select a network the address port and correction format used by the network will be displayed Note If you have already
59. profile GeoLock Opens the GeoLock Settings screen Delete Deletes the selected instrument profile Import Imports an instrument profile from an instrument profile file that was previously loaded on the data collector Export Saves the selected instrument profile to a file which can then be transferred to another data collector and then imported Instrument Settings Screen Two The second Instrument Settings screen opens whenever a new instrument profile is being created or when an existing profile is being edited The options available on this screen will vary slightly depending on the total station model selected Name The name of the instrument profile being created or changed This is the name that appears in the list on the first Instrument Settings screen Brand Specify the manufacturer of the instrument that you are using from a dropdown list Model Specify the model of the instrument that you are using from a dropdown list Serial Port The serial port on the data collector used for communications with the total station Bluetooth can also be selected on a Recon or Ranger 500X for wireless communication between the data collector and a compatible total station Baud Rate The speed at which communication occurs with the total station This must match the baud rate configured within the total station Parity The parity used for communication with the instrument This must match the parity setting confi
60. rotation Projection Mapping Plane Mode The Projection screen is described here for when the horizontal projection mode is set to Mapping Plane Use this setting when you want your coordinate system to be a conformal map projection chosen from the coordinate system database file Status Line The text at the top of the screen describes the status of the horizontal projection solution Show Details Opens the Projection Details screen where the complete details of the calibration solution reference map projection and Geoid model are displayed Select Zone Opens the Select Coordinate System screen where you can choose a zone or site from the data base key in a custom zone and delete zones or sites from the database Mapping Plane Ground Opens the Ground Coordinates screen where the grid to ground conversion parameters can be calculated and applied Solve Calibration Opens the Solve Calibration screen where control points can be selected and the horizontal and vertical calibration are solved Switch to Default Ground Calibration Switches the horizontal projection mode from Mapping Plane mode to Ground Default Ground Calibration mode Select Coordinate System The Select Coordinate System screen is used to choose a mapping plane zone or localized site from the coordinate system database file You can also open the Key In Zone wizard to create a new zone and datum with user specified 122 Survey Pro
61. routine is enhanced when using a DTM file as opposed to a DXF file DTM Source is where you select your reference DTM surface If using a layer toggle the button to gt Layer and then select the layer from the dropdown list If using a DTM or DXF file toggle the button to gt File and then tap the power button and Browse then select the appropriate file Warning If importing a DXF or DTM file where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job the imported coordinates will be converted to the current job s distance units when they are imported This is normally the desired result but it can cause a problem if the distance units for the imported data or the current job were set incorrectly This situation can most commonly occur when working with International Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious Usually the difference between International Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible 2 parts per million but when 161 Survey Pro Help 5 00 dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates which are often very large in magnitude the difference can be considerable if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other If importing coordinates from a source where you are not sure if the units are in International Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to International Feet or US Survey Feet you will usually just want t
62. screen is tapped the epoch count stops and the GNSS Status screen opens Go SOUTH NORTH displays the distance the rover must move in a south or north direction to reach the closest point on the line Go EAST WEST displays the distance the rover must move in an east or west direction to reach the closest point on the line gt OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Results Current Location displays either the directions to the closest point on the line or the current local coordinate LEFT of Line RIGHT of Line ON LINE displays the position of the rover with respect to the line Left and right are relative to north ON LINE is displayed when you are within the Line Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset distance from the line to the rover Station displays the station on the line associated with the offset location It is relative to the Start Point defined in the first screen gt Results gt N E Z toggles the display between Results and Current Location Store prompts you for a point name and description and stores a point for the current location Slope Staking Stakeout Slope Staking Th
63. selected you can configure the job to use map plane ground coordinates Combined Factor Enter a combined scale factor if already known otherwise is the combined scale factor computed from the Calculate Scale wizard Grid Factor Enter a map plane scale factor if already known otherwise is the scale factor computed from the Calculate Scale wizard Calculate Scale Opens the Calculate Scale wizard which is used to calculate a combined scale factor or map plane scale factor Setup Map Ground Coordinates First checks that a map projection is selected and if not prompt you to select one Next opens a wizard where after providing an origin point and ground system offset coordinates the entire job northing easting database will be updated with the ground coordinate system transformation Change Map Zone Opens the Select Coordinate System wizard where you can choose a mapping plane zone or calibrated site from the coordinate system database file You can also create a new zone and datum with user specified parameters Calculate Scale Job Settings Scale Factor Setup Scale Calculate Scale The Calculate Scale wizard is available when Use a single combined scale factor or Use a grid factor with sea level correction is selected in the Scale Settings screen and is used to compute a scale factor If a map zone is not currently selected you will first be required to set one up before continuing Projection Displays the details a
64. shots to the stake point are performed Stake Points Screen 3 Height of Rod is the length of the rod Design Elev displays the current design elevation which can be modified with the Change button FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must move forward toward the total station or backward away from the total station Go RIGHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must move to the right or left from the total station s point of view EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports 139 Survey Pro Help 5 00 CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store stores the stake point Store Tape opens the Stake Out Point Tape Offset screen where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo SS stores a sid
65. solved This button is active only when the intermediate mapping plane is already set up Switch to Mapping Plane Switches the horizontal projection mode from Ground Default Ground Calibration to Mapping Plane Projection Details Survey Projection Show Details The Projection Details screen is used to view the numeric parameters of the current coordinate system solution You can also choose to save the coordinate system to the data base from this screen Save System To Database Saves the current projection record to a coordinate system database file First the current database file is checked for a matching record and if found you will be prompted that you need not save the current coordinate system If no matching record is found then the current coordinate system will be saved as a new record If a different record with the same name is found you will be prompted to rename the current record before you can save Calibration Set Zone Survey Projection Reset Origin The Calibration Set Zone screen is used to manually configure the parameters of the calibration reference stereographic projection It is also used to select the geoid model to use with calibration coordinate systems Projection Origin Set the origin coordinate for the default projection Latitude Enter the origin latitude of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually set at the latitude of the first GNSS control point
66. store the new point or cancel you will resume with the Slope Staking screen Results displays the results computed from the last Shot Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Cut Fill is the cut or fill required for the current rover location to be positioned on the design slope Toward CL Away CL is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it respectively before it is positioned at the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value On Station Back Sta Ahead Sta informs you if the rod is on the station being staked or the distance it must move parallel to the centerline back or ahead to be on the correct station 173 Survey Pro Help 5 00 HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point VD to HP is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point HD to CL is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline VD to CL is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline Line and Offset Stakeout Line and Offset The instructions for the Line and Offset routine for GNSS similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight a
67. survey This option will allow you to select a 2D point for the occupy point and will disable the height of instrument and rod controls in setup and measurement taking user interface Shots per Resect Point Enter the number of repetition sets you will collect for each point 70 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Sequence Select the mode to shoot each set of the resection measurements You can choose between Direct and Reverse or Direct Only Check Setup This button is only available when there is already a station setup in place Tap Check Setup to open the Station Check screen Station Setup Resection Observations Resect Point Enter the name of the known point to observe next in the resection Option Select the measurement option You can choose between Distance and Angle and Angle Only HR Enter the height of rod for each observation Observe Triggers the instrument to take an observation and adds the results Point List Shows the points observed so far and the residuals of those points in the current resection solution if it is solved You can tap on the check box to the left of each point name to enable or disable the use of that point in the resection solution The solution is automatically resolved each time you change the resection point assignments Next gt Advances the wizard to the resection Results screen You must have enough observations to solve the resection before you can advance Station Setup Resection
68. that is set in the data collector This function is not available when shooting the backsight Sun Shot Procedure Summary e Point the telescope ahead of the path of the sun and lock the horizontal movement of the total station e Immediately record the horizontal angle from the total station using the Take Shot button e When the target becomes properly aligned with the cross hairs record the current time as accurately as possible The time can be automatically read from the data collector using the Get Local Time button or measured from an external time piece and manually entered in the appropriate fields e When finished tap the button to complete the current observation When all observations are complete the Results page displays the computed azimuth to the backsight Results Card BS D R The horizontal angle recorded to the backsight for the particular direct reverse observation Azi D R The computed azimuth to the backsight for the particular direct reverse observation Avg The computed average azimuth of the backsight relative to true north Grid Avg The computed average azimuth of the backsight relative to the local State Plane grid This field is only displayed when a state grid correction is applied Note See the User Manual for more information on the usage of the Solar Observation routine Remote Control Survey Remote Control Remote control mode is a special mode that makes it easier for users to
69. the Current station by the Interval Sta increases the Current station by the Interval Layout computes either the elevation at the specified Current station or the station s at the specified Elevation Results PVC sta is the station at the PVC PVI sta is the station at the PVI PVT sta is the station at the PVT Elev is the elevation for the respective point Hi Lo sta is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero the crest of the curve Straight Grade Curve Straight Grade The Straight Grade screen will solve for the elevation at a specified station or a station at a specified elevation on a straight grade Begin Station is the station where the straight grade begins Begin Elev is the elevation at the Begin station Grade is the percent slope Solve for is where you select to solve for an Elevation or a Station The choice made here determines which of the following selections are available End station is the station where you want to compute the elevation Interval When checked the End station can be incremented by the specified interval by using the Station and Station buttons and then re computed with the Layout button End Elevation is the elevation at the point where you want to compute the station Layout performs the computation and displays the results Results Station is the current station 201 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Elevation is the elevat
70. the horizontal view of the centerline include within the LandXML file and the box on the 163 Survey Pro Help 5 00 right shows the vertical view Set Center Line allows you to select any polyline or alignment in the current job to use as a centerline This will replace any centerline loaded from the LandXML file View Cross Sections opens the Cross Section View screen described below where you can view the station surface and offset details of the loaded LandXML file Load From LandXML opens the Open screen where you can select which LandXML file to load Backsight opens the Station Setup screen where you can set your backsight Next gt opens the next Station Staking screen Cross Section View Stakeout Station Staking View Cross Sections The Cross Section View screen is used to view the station surface and offset details of the loaded LandXML file The upper portion of the screen lists the Station Northing Easting and Elevation at the selected node The larger graphic area displays the cross sectional view of the selected surface The smaller graphic area displays the horizontal view of the centerline ea Zoom Extents will zoom so the entire cross section will fit inside the frame A Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 Y Zoom Out Button will zoom the current screen out by approximately 25 E expands a list where you can select to zoom to a window z
71. to the new point see diagram A positive value extends away from the total station where a negative value is closer to the total station Elevation Offset The vertical offset from the line to the new point See diagram A positive value will result in a new point above the reference line and a negative value results in a new point below the reference line Shoot Line Prompts you to take two shots on the horizontal reference line Note Each shot can be in any location on the reference line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 but the 81 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Horiz Offset is always measured from Shot 1 Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where you can set and check your station occupy point and backsight Note After each shot is complete the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation Corner amp Plane Survey Corner amp Plane The Corner and Plane screen is used to store a point using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot be shot but three points on the same plane can be shot Foresight The name of the point that will be stored Description The description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 Shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Shoot Plane Prompts you to take three shots on the same flat surface that the new point
72. use Measure To Specify the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured Enter the distance from the ground to the Measured To location Radius Shows the radius of the antenna from the measure to mark if the measure to mark is not for a true vertical height Offset Shows the offset from the measure to mark to the L1 phase center of the antenna The L1 phase center is the location that RTK fixed positions are measured to Note If your antenna type is Manual then the Radius and Offset fields will allow you to enter values otherwise they display the known values for the chosen antenna Serial Enter the serial number for the antenna This information is optional and is written to the raw data Notch Enter the number of the notch you are measuring to for slant measure marks that have multiple notch points 106 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note When the measure to mark is true vertical the Radius and Notch fields will not be available Set Updates the receiver antenna settings with the values selected on this screen Note When this screen is used by the RTK rover for updates of antenna height during a survey the Set button will send the new antenna parameters to the receiver as well as updating the software s settings Select Base Point The Select Base Point screen is used to choose the point in the job file where the base is located or to store a new point for the base receiver setup
73. use the computed values for calculations from the Past Results power button option Projection Displays the current mapping plane settings Select Point Enter the name of the reference point where the rotation or scale is to be computed Calc Rotation gt Opens the Projection Calculator screen where the rotation is computed Cale Scale gt Opens the Projection Calculator screen where the scale is computed 130 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Projection Calculator Rotation Convergence Displays the computed rotation from grid north to geodetic north Rotation Displays the computed rotation from geodetic north to grid north lt Back Returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Accept Copies the two computed values to past results and returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Projection Calculator Scale Height Correction Ellipsoid Height Enter the WGS84 ellipsoid height for your current location This value will be used to calculate the height above the terrain component of the scale factor This is sometimes referred to as the sea level correction lt Back Returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Solve gt Takes you to the final screen Projection Calculator Scale Mapping Plane Scale Factor Displays the computed mapping plane scale factor on the selected mapping plane at the reference point Ellipsoid Scale Factor Displays the computed ellipsoid scale facto
74. using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Turn Instrument available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake Next gt returns you to the second Offset Staking screen without storing a stake point where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value 146 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Offset Staking Screen 6 This screen is used to describe the stake point before it is stored and select if the Results screen should be displayed Point is the point name for the stake point being stored Description is the description for the stake point being stored The default description is the station side and distance from the centerline for the design point Show Results on OK When this checkbox is checked a Results screen will open after tapping from this screen Note This screen will not appear if the Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point checkbox is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen although the Results screen will still appear if the Show Results on OK checkbox was never unchecked from this screen It is checked by default Offset Staking Stakeout Results This screen shows detailed cut fill values which may be needed when marking a road or offset stake x Close returns you to the second Offset Staking screen where the Design Point is advanced by the Increment value Slope Stak
75. vertical precision computed by the receiver Tap on this button to open the detailed GNSS Status screen The first button selects the type of slope that will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options e gt Automatic Slope selects the slope based on the current rover position If the rover is above the hinge point a cut slope is computed If the rover is below the hinge point a fill slope is computed gt Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a cut slope e gt Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope The second button selects which information is displayed in the lower corner of the screen from the following options e gt V Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point e gt H Map displays an overhead view of the job gt N E Z displays the coordinates computed from the last shot Occupy opens the Occupy Data Points screen where data can be collected for the current point Side Shot allows you to store a side shot measurement during stake out This button opens a prompt for the side shot point name and opens the GNSS Occupy Data Points screen After you
76. you can calculate a shift and rotation of DXF basemaps to the job file Edit Basemaps From the Map View tap Si Edit The Edit Basemaps screen is used to preview the selected basemap and if it is a DXF basemap you can set the file units modify the visibility and selectability of specific layers and toggle the orientation of the DXF basemap on and off Layers Card DXF basemaps only The Layers card is used to control the visibility and object selectability of specific layers of a DXF basemap The Layers card contains four columns e Layer Shows the name of each individual layer in the DXF file e Visibility Displays the state of the layer visibility You can toggle the state by tapping on the Visibility column There are three states Selectable the layer is visible on the map and objects on this layer can be selected in the active map Shown the layer is visible but objects on this layer cannot be selected in the active map Hidden the layer is not visible and objects on this layer cannot be selected on the active map e Points Displays a count of point objects on the DXF layer e Lines Displays a count of line objects on the DXF layer Hide All Sets the Visibility state of all layers to hidden 229 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Show All Sets the Visibility state of all layers to shown Selectable All Sets the Visibility state of all layers to selectable General Card DXF basemaps only The General card is u
77. 0 Values Enter the values for the custom ellipse if you are not using Ellipse from List Ellipse a Enter the semi major axis of the new ellipsoid Other Parameter Select the other ellipse parameter to enter You can use one of Semi minor axis Flattening Reciprocal flattening First eccentricity First eccentricity squared Second eccentricity Second eccentricity squared Key In Zone Datum Translation The Key In Zone Datum Translation screen is used to enter translations when the Datum Type is Molodensky or Similarity Datum Translate From WGS84 To Local Enter the three translations from WGS 84 to the local datum Note The sign convention for the datum translations is from WGS 84 to the local datum If your datum transformation is defined for local to WGS84 be sure to inverse values before entering in the software Key In Zone Datum Rotation and Scale The Key In Zone Datum Rotation and Scale screen is used to enter translations when the Datum Type is or Similarity Datum Rotations From WGS84 To Local Enter the three rotations from WGS84 to the local datum Scale Factor ppm Enter the scale of the datum transformation from WGS 84 to the local datum The scale factor is entered in parts per million Note The sign convention for the datum rotations and scale factor is from WGS84 to the local datum If your datum transformation is defined for local to WGS84 be sure to inverse the values before entering in the software
78. 00 Session Time Displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status Displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap Topo SS while the number of epochs is averaged in the software Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver Topo SS Prompts for description layer and feature code depending on your Survey settings for the new point then returns to the previous screen GNSS Status Opens the GNSS Status screen Control Points Survey Control Points or Data Collection Control The Control Points screen is used to measure GNSS control points to use in the calibration adjustment or to check the location of exiting points against GPS measurements and the latest coordinate system GNSS Status Displays the current solution type radio signal quality number of satellites used and the receiver s estimate of the horizontal precision of the current point If this area is tapped the GNSS Status screen will open Set HR Displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next control or check point collection You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to sett
79. 5 00 Height of rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Station Setup screen lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the third Stake Line and Offset screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing Solve gt depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Stake Line and Offset Screen 3 Station displays the current station that is being staked H Offset displays the offset distance of the line being staked from the specified line and if it is on the Right or Left side of the specified line From Instrument to Design Point displays the direction and distance that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design
80. 99 30 656076 New York 74 00 0 654082 Long Island North 9 00 0 577171 Carolina orth Dakota 744133 00 30 129383 Ohio 2 30 656950 2 30 634520 Oregon South Texas 8 00 8 00 20 30 20 30 745 745 1 00 PRRP oo S 00 00 00 20 6 00 01 30 590147 567617 709186 684147 661540 648793 564497 544652 107738 689852 585440 579536 7 30 545394 00 20 515059 9 00 4899 13 8 30 454007 E S 5 lt a9 I 5 pee 2 n S 5 19 S 5 ig N A lt a9 J9 5 pee z 6 5 Ay 5 i ia Ha ertn in Dakota Tennesee 11 30 659355 11 30 640579 EEE PREECE EEL 1 Pr P 11 30 8 30 8 30 20 50 20 30 9 30 1 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Oo 612687 624118 606925 744520 726396 637773 618195 21371 705577 687103 PEE SEF eee eee EEEeELE Eee eH EB EH Survey Pro Help 5 00 236 Survey Pro Help 5 00 237
81. Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the third Define a Location screen where the new point can be staked out Note The third Define a Location screen is identical to the third Stake Points screen Where is Next Point Stakeout Where Is Next Point The Where is Next Point screen is used to assist the rod person in locating another point given the current rod point a reference point and the point to locate 166 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Current Rod Pt is the current rod point Next FS Point is the point that the rod person wants to locate Increment is added to the Next FS Point value after pressing the Next Point gt button A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt advances the Next FS Point value by the specified Increment replaces the current rod point by the previous FS point and accesses Screen 2 Note If the Next FS Point does not exist and the Increment value 1 pressing the Next Point butt
82. Antenna Raw Data Edit GNSS Antenna Job View Raw Data Edit GNSS Antenna The Raw Data Edit GNSS Antenna screen allows you to edit the GNSS antenna height for the base or rover setup Antenna Displays the antenna type for this antenna record Measured Enter the measured antenna height To Enter the measure to mark for this antenna measurement Serial Enter the antenna serial number for record keeping purposes Select Observations Select the survey observations that you wish to apply this edit to Select All Select all of the observations currently using this GNSS antenna record Unselect All Clears the selection of observations Note If you selected the GNSS antenna record to edit from the root of the record tree by default all observations that use that antenna will be updated with the new antenna If you selected the GNSS antenna record to edit from an individual observation by default only that observation s antenna will be updated Raw Data Note Job View Raw Data Note 55 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Raw Data Note screen is used to append a note to an individual raw data record or to the end of the raw data records in the job The note can consist of any string of text The buttons in the lower portion of the screen can be tapped to quickly enter any of ten default Foresight linework commands These buttons can also be customized or new buttons can be created Write Now Appends the text
83. Calibration coordinate system that is parallel to a selected mapping plane grid using a single GNSS control point to determine the translation between the two systems This state is only available when your projection mode is set to Default Ground Calibration Solve H Check this box to apply only the horizontal solution The current vertical solution is maintained Solve V Check this box to apply only the vertical solution The current horizontal solution is maintained 120 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Solve from Control Points Calibration scale Calculate scale from control points Select this option to calculate the best fit scale parameter from the horizontal control points This is the default setting Fix scale to 1 0 Select this option to calculate a fixed scale calibration where the rotation and translation are calculated from control points but the scale is fixed to 1 0 Note When you are using Default Ground Calibration mode a scale of 1 0 will give ground distance at the default origin height which is usually the height of the first control point You can modify the default calibration zone using the Calibration Set Zone screen When you are using Mapping Plane mode a scale of 1 0 will give you exact grid distances on the mapping plane Calibration origin Origin at centroid of control points Select this option to solve the origin parameter at the centroid of the horizontal control points This is the default setting S
84. Collect Quick Codes Corner amp 2 Lines Corner amp Angle Corner amp Offset Corner amp Plane Surface Scan Shoot From Two Ends Record Mode Remote Elevation Check Point Solar Observation Remote Control On Board Index Main Index Station Setup Index Station Setup Station Setup Known Point Station Setup Resection Station Setup Use Last Check Setup Survey Menu Index Main Index Traverse Index Traverse Sideshot Point Exists Screen Traverse Results Traverse Now Screen Traverse Wizard 65 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Survey Menu Index Main Index Offsets Index Distance Offsets Horizontal Angle Offset Vertical Angle Offset Survey Menu Index Main Index AutoCollect Index Auto Collect Auto Collect Part 2 Survey Menu Index Main Index Corners Index Corner amp 2 Lines Corner amp Angle Corner amp Offset Corner amp Plane Survey Menu Index Main Index Surface Scan Index Surface Scan Surface Scan Statistics Surface Scan Results Survey Menu Index Main Index Solar Observation Index Solar Observation Taking Shots Enter Shot Data Screen Sun Shot Procedure 66 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Results Survey Menu Index Main Index Remote Control Index Remote Control Remote Shots Results Card Video Card Video Display Options Video Settings Map Card Aim Card Foresight Card Turn To Sky Plot GeoLock Settings Survey Menu Index Main Index On board
85. Configure Opens the Modem Serial Comms screen where you can change the settings for communication between the receiver and the cellphone Select modem fields Select Modem Select the required IP modem Create Modem Create a new modem Edit Modem Edit the existing modem parameters Delete Modem Delete the existing modem parameters Windows networking settings Dial up Connection Select the required connection from the drop down list Manage Connections Manage all existing connections Show Advanced Settings Show advanced settings Modem Serial Comms Screen The Modem Serial Comms screen is used to change the settings for communication between the base or rover receiver and the data modem GNSS Receiver Port Select the serial port the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Baudrate Select the baud rate the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Parity Select the parity the receiver will use to communicate with the modem This setting disabled for receivers that do not support user defined parity setting Defaults Automatically sets all the selectable values to their defaults based on the current receiver hardware Receiver Set Sets the selected modem communication settings for the specified port on the receiver Note The modem communication settings are also set in the receiver during the base and rover setup procedure Therefore you will not usually have to use the Receiver Set bu
86. D View screen is used to view the DTM from any angle Settings Opens the 3D View Settings screen described below where the information displayed in the 3D view can be configured Volume Displays the total cut and fill volume between the area that has been staked and a reference datum whose elevation is specified in the 3D View Settings screen or the total cut and fill between the area that has been staked and the selected DTM Datum Displays the datum elevation set in the 3D View Settings screen 123 fesl Toggles to display or hide the point names and descriptions a When this button is activated dragging within the 3D View will result in the image being rotated to any angle e When the button is activated dragging within the 3D View will pan the image 3D View Settings Job View DTM 3D View Settings The 3D View Settings screen is used to configure the information displayed in the 3D View screen Height Exaggerated to the Maximum When checked the height exaggeration is automatically set to a high value When unchecked the height exaggeration can be set manually in the next field Height Exaggeration Ratio The value that the height is multiplied by in the 3D view Higher values mean more exaggeration a value of 1 0 would result in no exaggeration 59 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Hidden line Removal When checked will hide all the lines that occur behind other surfaces in the 3D View The image shown here is ide
87. Distance will vary depending on how frequently the total station measures a distance and how fast the prism is traveling EM A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen Next gt Opens the next Auto Collect screen Auto Collect Screen 2 The second Auto Collect screen displays information related to the points that have been stored and when the next point will be stored The box in the upper left corner displays the direction and distance the total station is aiming relative to the backsight The upper right corner displays the next store point number and when the next point will be stored in either seconds or distance The lower left corner is a graphic that shows the current total station position the current prism position and when collecting by distance the approximate location of the next store point represented by an X based on the speed and direction the prism is moving from the previous store point Previous stored points are also displayed as dots in this part of the screen The lower right corner of the screen displays the number of points that have been stored and the speed and direction the prism is traveling Store Now Stores a point at the current prism location even if the time distance criteria are not yet met lt Back Returns to the previous Auto Collect screen Start Stop Toggles between starting or stopping the Auto Collect routine 79 Sur
88. Help 5 00 parameters Database Select what type of coordinate system record to choose You can e Use Database Zone Displays controls to pick a map projection from the regions and zones in the database e Use Database Site Displays controls to pick a localized zone based site from the Site region in the database Region Select the region of the map projection zone Zone Select the specific map projection zone Datum View or select the horizontal datum for this zone Note Some zones in the database may not have a default datum attached In this case the datum control is a list box and you must select from the data base datums before you can set the zone Use Geoid Select to use a geoid model with this zone You can pick a geoid model from the database using the drop down box Delete Zone Deletes the currently selected site or zone Note This delete function cannot be undone Also you cannot delete system database records If you select a protected record you will be prompted that the record cannot be deleted Key In Zone gt Tap to open the Key In Zone screen where you can create a custom map projection zone ellipsoid and datum Finish Accepts the currently selected zone and readjusts the job coordinates to the latest projection Key In Zone Survey Projection Select Zone Key In Zone gt The Key In Zone wizard is used to generate a custom mapping plane zone Key In Zone Setup The Key In Zone Set
89. Key In Zone Datum from Database The Key In Zone Datum from Database screen is used to select a database datum when the Datum Type is Pick from Data Base Datum Select the data base datum to use for the new zone Key In Zone Results The Key In Zone Results screen is used to review the values you input for the zone to be created Store Opens a prompt to enter the region and zone of the new map projection zone stores the named zone in the data base and sets the zone as the current projection record Ground Coordinates Survey Projection Setup Ground Coordinates The Ground Coordinates wizard is used to apply a switch between mapping plane grid and ground coordinates This feature is only used when the horizontal projection mode is Mapping Plane 125 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Ground Coordinates Setup The Ground Coordinates Setup screen is used to toggle between grid and ground coordinates and to select how to define the origin of the ground coordinate system Projection Definition Choose how to represent the mapping plane coordinates There are two options e Use Grid Coordinates WGS84 geodetic coordinates will be transformed into mapping plane zone coordinates Horizontal distances on the ground are usually scaled to the grid e Use Ground Coordinates WGS84 geodetic coordinates will be transformed into ground scaled coordinates translated to a local origin Horizontal distances on the ground are 1 1 on the grid because t
90. M This button can be toggled to various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores the stake point Alignment Card Station displays the station at the rod position Template displays the name of the template that is used at the rod position Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Elev displays the elevation at the rod position Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position Right of Line Left of Line On Line displays if the rod position is to the right of the centerline left of the centerline or on the centerline respectively Cross Section Card Station displays the station at the rod position Template displays the name of the template that is used at the rod position Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position 217 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Cut Fill is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position even with the road s surface Cut Fill to CL is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the centerline at the current station Cut Fill to Edge is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the o
91. Note if a closing location is not specified it is automatically assumed that the first point of the traverse will be the closing location Location allows you to enter coordinates to define the closing location e North is the Y coordinate for the closing location e East is the X coordinate for the closing location e Elev is the elevation for the closing location Point allows you to select an existing point to define the closing location Point is the name of the existing point at the closing location Next opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard Traverse Adjust Results This screen displays the changes that will be made by the adjustment where they can be previewed before the actual adjustment is made The screen lists the adjustment details in three main sections the angle adjustment details the compass rule adjustment details and the point details where the before and after coordinates for each point are listed Error dist is the horizontal distance between the starting point and closing point Error azm is the direction from the closing point to the starting point Precision is the ratio of the error distance to the length Angular error is the difference between N 2 180 and the actual sum of the internal angles where N is the number of sides in the traverse Length is the sum of all the sides of the boundary Perimeter is the length plus the error distance Adjust if the results in th
92. Pro Help 5 00 Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after tapping Solve gt depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Curve and Offset Screen 3 Station displays the current station that is being staked H Offset displays the offset distance of the curve being staked from the specified curve and if it is on the Right or Left side of the specified curve Angle Right is the horizontal angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Horz distance is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the current station Vert Distance is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the current station ZE to Rod is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this butt
93. Recent Job list in the Open New screen A list of all the jobs in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you want to open and then tap Note A CR5 file can be opened just like any JOB file When a CRS5 file is opened it is automatically converted and stored to a JOB file with the same name If a matching RW5 raw data file exists it too will be converted and saved to a RAW file with a note inserted indicating that the conversion took place When a job is being opened the Loading JOB file screen will open briefly and display the status of the loading process Save As File Save As The Save As screen allows you to save a copy of the current job under a new name The copy that is created will then become the current job The Save As screen is identical to that found in other Windows applications Simply enter a new name for the current 9 Survey Pro Help 5 00 job and then tap the Save button Note It is not necessary to include the survey extension since it will automatically be added for you Import File Import The Import screen is used to add the points from another source into the current job or import the data from a LandXML file to the current job Warning Coordinate values can change when they are imported Importing coordinates from any source other than a Survey Pro file survey JOB JXL requires that the distance units used in the source file be spe
94. SC or ST X of Throw is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point Y of Throw is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve X is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent Y is distance from the SC to the tangent Delta is the angle between the tangent and the line between the PI and SC 203 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Roads Menu The Roads Menu contains the routines used to perform road layout Edit Templates Index Edit Alignments Edit Roads Index Road Stakeout Index Road Slope Staking Index Show Station Index Station Equation Main Index Edit Templates Index Add Edit Templates Edit Template Edit Segment Roads Menu Index Main Index Edit Roads Index Add Edit Roads New Road Screen Edit Road The Road Card Roads Report Screen Road Profiles Screen Road Alignment Properties Screen The Templates Card Add Edit Template Screen The Widenings Card Add Edit Widening Screen Super Elevations Card Add Edit Super Elevation Screen Roads Menu Index Main Index Road Stakeout Index Road Stakeout Stake Road Screen 2 Stake Road Screen 3 Stake Road Screen 4 204 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Roads Menu Index Main Index Road Slope Staking Index Road Slope Staking Road Slope Staking Screen 2 Roads Menu Index Main Index Show Station Index Road Station and Offset Road Station and Offset Scre
95. Select Zone Select Database The Select Database screen is used to select the coordinate system database to use This screen will list all of the coordinate system database files csd you have in the program s directory Highlight the csd file you wish to use and tap to load the selected coordinate system database file Solve Calibration The Solve Calibration screen is used to calculate a calibration solution using the currently assigned horizontal and vertical control points This is the same screen as the Solve Calibration Results screen described in the start survey sections You can also use this screen to open the Calibration Settings screen where you can modify the way a calibration is solved from control points or manually input calibration parameters To open the Calibration Settings screen tap on the settings icon when the Solve Calibration screen is open Calibration Settings The Calibration Settings screen is used to modify the default settings for solving a calibration from control points or to manually enter calibration parameters from values Method Select the desired state The options are e Solve from control points Use this state to select the settings to be used when solving the calibration from the GNSS control points e Key in parameters Use this state to open interface that allows you to key in parameters for a calibration solution e Calibration calculator Use this state to setup a Default Ground
96. Stake Line and Offset Stakeout Line and Offset The Stake Line and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a line or at an offset to it at fixed intervals Start Point defines the first point of the line to be staked End Point Direction defines the second point of the line or the direction of the line to be staked respectively Begin Station defines the station associated with the Start Point Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Next gt opens the next screen ia opens the Stakeout Settings screen Stake Line and Offset Screen 2 Station to Stake is the desired station that you want to stake Station Interval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Sta button is pressed Next Sta advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Offset defines the offset distance and if the offset occurs to the right of the line when R is selected or left when L is selected The right or left side is referenced while viewing the line from the Start Point Vertical Offset is the offset distance that is below the design location when D is selected or above the design location when U is selected gt Grade specifies a slope from the specified line to the parallel line that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the design elevations as the Offset value increases 153 Survey Pro Help
97. Store Tan Pt When checked will store the computed tangent points Solve computes the location of the tangent line and optionally stores the two tangent points Results TP 1 displays the coordinates for the first tangent point TP 2 displays the coordinates for the second tangent point Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent line from the first tangent point to the second Distance is the length of the tangent line Horizontal Curve Layout Curve Curve Layout The Curve Layout screen is used to assist in the layout of a horizontal curve by computing the direction and distance to points on the curve using a variety of methods Method The method determines how the points on the curve are laid out Each method is described below PC Deflection provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI The results are given in the following format e Station is the current station on the curve e Deflection is the angle to turn to the current station Long chord is the distance from the PC to the current station e Short chord is the distance from the previous station to the current station PI Deflection provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PI and backsight the PC The results are given in the following format e Station is the current station on the curve 196 Survey Pro Help 5 00 e Deflection i
98. Survey Pro Help 5 00 Main Menu Home Screen Main Menu File Menu Job Menu Survey Menu Survey Menu for GNSS Survey Menu for GNSS Post Processing Stakeout Menu Stakeout Menu for GNSS Inverse Menu COGO Menu Curve Menu Roads Menu Adjust Menu Miscellaneous Screens Appendix Survey Pro Help 5 00 Home Screen The Home Screen allows you to create customized menus with your frequently used functions You can navigate to the Home Screen from any menu in Survey Pro by tapping on the home icon at the upper left corner of the screen If you are on the Home Screen you can return to the main menu by tapping the menu icon at the upper left corner of the screen If you are currently on a sub menu screen you can return to the main menu by tapping on the menu up icon at the upper right corner of the screen You can tap and hold on any Survey Pro sub menu item to add it to the home screen When you tap and hold on a menu item select Add to Home to place this menu item on your home screen When you do so the home screen will appear in the edit mode and the following icons appear on the home screen positions e Open square Tap at this location to place the new menu item in an unused position on the home screen When the home screen is in edit mode you can change pages to access a different page to place the item on e Closed square Tap at this location to place the new menu item in an already occupied position on the home screen The
99. TEODT and hang up command ATHO are entered by default on a new configuration See IP Modem Settings Number to Dial Enter the telephone number of the RTK base receiver s cell phone Hang Up Alternate Hayes AT command to use for hanging up Dial Command Alternate Hayes AT command to use for dialing IP Modem Settings The IP Modem Settings screen is used to create or modify an IP modem configuration for a network server You can only configure in IP modem when RTK Rover is selected for the receiver Connect Command AT modem command to connect to the base server Default it ATEO amp DODT Disconnect Command AT modem command to disconnect from the Internet Default is ATHO General Receiver Settings 29 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The General tab enables you to change general settings on the receiver Every receiver has the option to change the elevation cutoff angle and the option to set the receiver to Off Mode Models which have special settings available are described below Elevation cutoff Keep receiver from using satellites in its position calculation that are below the given angle The elevation angle is given in degrees above the horizon and can be anywhere from 0 degrees use all satellites to 90 degrees use no satellites Set Rx to OFF Mode Tap to set your receiver to Off mode This is where your receiver does not output or accept base corrections effectively stopping RTK operations This may be necessary i
100. The End Recording menu is used to stop recording When you tap End Recording you are first prompted to select a receiver with the Connect to Post Process Receiver screen If the selected receiver is logging data you will be prompted to end logging with the End Survey screen 134 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Stakeout Menu The Stakeout Menu contains a variety of stakeout routines including offset staking Stake Points Index Stake List of Points Index Stake to Line Index Offset Staking Index Slope Staking Index Point Slope Staking Index Stake Line amp Offset Index Stake Curve amp Offset Index Stake Spiral amp Offset Index Show Station amp Offset Index Store Offset Points Index Stake DTM Index Station Staking Index Define Location Index Next Point Index Navigation Main Index Note The stakeout routines behave differently when running in remote control mode For a description of this special mode see the Remote Control section of the User s Manual Stake Points Index Stake Points Stake Points Screen 2 Stake Points Screen 3 Instrument Stakeout Remote Staking Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake List of Points Index Stake List of Points Screen Edit Point List Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake to Line Index 135 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Stake to Line Stake to Line Screen 2 Remote Stake to Line Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Offset Staking Index Offset Staking Offset Stakin
101. The Rotate screen will rotate selected points around a specified point This is useful to correct a survey where an incorrect backsight was used during data collection Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view To From allows you to select points by typing in a point range Rotation Point The selected points will be rotated around the point specified here The coordinates for the rotation point will not change Simple Angle when selected this allows you to enter the deflection angle to rotate the selected points Old and New Azimuths when selected this allows you to enter an old and new azimuth which is used to compute the angle to rotate the selected points Note The choice made from the two options above determines which fields will be available below Rotate is the angle to rotate the selected points around the Rotation point Old Azimuth Old Bearing is a known direction between any two points in the current job before they are 220 Survey Pro Help 5 00 rotated New Azimuth New Bearing is the direction between the same two points specified above after the rotation Solve will perform the rotation on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly Traverse Adjust Adjust Traverse Adjust The Traverse Adjust wizard is a series of screens that allow you to adjust a closed traverse for angular error and or perform a compass rule adjustment on a closed
102. Tracklight Toggle between using the laser pointer or tracklight Lock Toggle the prism lock state Close button Tap to go to the Survey Pro main menu Note Taking a shot can be a two step process depending on the setting for the MSR key First initiate a measurement with the MSR key Once the shot has returned data it appears on the dialog You can then store the displayed values as a sideshot or a traverse shot Quick Shot dialog settings 92 Survey Pro Help 5 00 To open the dialog tap the settings icon in the title bar Display Options are HA ZA SD or HA HD VD Controls the values that appear in the Quick Shot screen MSR Key There are two options Measure Only When the MSR key is pressed a measurement is initiated but no shot is stored e Measure and Store When the MSR key is pressed a measurement is initiated and a sideshot is stored if a JOB is Open Note The MSR2 key always operates in Measure and Store mode Shell to External Mode Tap the Data Collector icon to open the Data Collection mode screen This enables you to use an external data collector Exit and Go Robotic Tap to change the radio channel and ID before the software is set to the internal radio and exits the software Exit and Go RS232 USB Exits the application Quick Stake Routines Quick Stake enables you to quickly and simply stake out and store a point and will work for both motorized instruments with AutoLock capability and conve
103. When unchecked only direct shots are required Shoot Opens the Enter Shot Data screen described below where the shot data is entered for the selected observation Toss Incl Toggle the selected observation so that it will be hidden or un hidden respectively When an observation is hidden it will not be used when calculating the final azimuth Note The Toss Incl buttons perform the same function as checking un checking the checkbox in front of each observation Note A backsight observation cannot be tossed Del Permanently deletes the most current observation if it is selected allowing you to shoot that shot again 85 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Reset Permanently deletes all observations A warning prompt will appear before the observations are deleted The Enter Shot Data Screen Horizontal Angle Displays the horizontal angle measured by the total station This value is updated with the Take Shot button described below Current Date Time Displays the current date time and DUT These settings can be changed from the Date Time Settings screen Date If incorrect the current date should be entered here Time Where the precise time that the observation occurred is entered Hrs to GMT The number of hours that the time at the current location differs from Greenwich Mean Time Take Shot Records the horizontal angle from the total station Get Local Time Fills in the Time field with the current time
104. X file or NGS data sheet point Allows you to select any valid data sheet point found from the drop down list Details Opens a screen that lists the selected OPUS Solution Report or NGS data sheet point details Next gt Opens the final screen 128 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Enter Control Coordinate Key In The purpose of this screen is to manually input the control point coordinates This is the second screen that appears when Key In Coordinate was selected in the first screen Point n x Displays the name of the selected job point that the control point source will be merged into A counter is included where n is the number of points set so far including the one you are working on and x is the number of total points to set in this sequence Coordinate Type Select the type of coordinates being entered Grid Local LLH or WGS84 LLH The selection made here determines the format for the following three fields Latitude North The Latitude Northing of the control point source Longitude East The Longitude Easting of the control point source Height Elevation The Height Elevation of the control point source Next gt Restarts the wizard if more control points need to be set or opens the final screen if all control points are set Review Results and Finish The final screen of the wizard shows a preview of the control point coordinates to be created If there is only one point selected the Single Poi
105. Zenith is the computed zenith angle from the occupy point to the foresight point Slope Dist is the computed slope distance from the occupy point to the foresight point SD ZA to HD VD Cogo SD ZA to HD VD The SD ZA to HD VD screen will convert a slope distance and zenith angle to an equivalent horizontal distance and vertical distance Slope Dist is the slope distance to be converted Zenith is the zenith angle to be converted HI is the distance that the total station is above the ground HR is the length of the rod 189 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Earth Curvature and Refraction Set the earth curvature and refraction correction coefficient Select None to turn earth curvature and refraction correction off for all observations from this station setup AU Conversion Cogo AU Conversion The AU Conversion Architectural Units Conversion screen will convert distances with fractional inches to decimal distances If the job is configured for International Feet or US Survey Feet it is assumed that the distance entered in this screen is in the same units as the job If the job is configured for meters it is assumed that the distance entered in this screen is in International Feet See Input Shortcuts in the User s Manual for more information on entering architectural units Convert Use will perform the conversion If this screen is accessed from the Quick Pick list when the cursor was in a distance field this but
106. a collector for receiver communication Note If you do not know the receiver s settings leave the default values If the program fails to connect it attempts to auto detect the correct settings Note If a profile already exists for a receiver scanned this way you are prompted to modify the existing profile or discard the changes If you choose to modify the profile this changes the connection settings only Connect Tap to establish a connection to the receiver and verify its capabilities This opens the last dialog of the Add Receiver wizard The confirmation dialog shows Name Receiver profile name Default to receiver model name and last four digits of the receiver serial number but can be overtyped Capabilities The icons show that the receiver is capable of RTK rover operations A RTK base operations Post processing operations Save Save the new receiver Data Modem Settings The Data Modem card is used to view and configure the settings for the modem used to transmit RTK base corrections or receiver RTK rover corrections Modem Select the type of modem There will be several options here depending on your brand and model If the modem you are using is not in the list of known devices select Generic Serial to set the communication parameters to work with just about any external data modem The icon to the left of the modem selection list indicates the RTK capabilities of the data modem The following icons in
107. a list of options to do any of the following e Switch to another instrument mode e Select a different instrument profile e Quickly access the Instrument Settings screen Battery Level m The battery icon at the bottom of the Main Menu displays the condition of the data collector s rechargeable battery The icon has five variations depending on the level of charge remaining 100 ma 75 ma 50 m 25 m 5 and s charging Tapping the battery icon is a shortcut to the Microsoft Power Settings screen You can get more information while viewing this screen from the online help Quick Pick wt The 2 Quick Pick button is used to quickly access any of a variety of commonly used routines The list of routines available is customizable using the Quick Pick Editor Online Help Tapping the button opens the online help which allows you to access information similar to the information you would find in the reference manual for each screen Other Command Bar Buttons The following command bar buttons are available in screens other than the Main Menu Each is described below OK Performs the desired action then closes the current screen x Cancel Closes the current screen without performing the action intended by the screen Survey Pro Help 5 00 Close Closes the current screen Settings Opens the Settings screen associated with the current screen GPS Status This is used to view the current status and access
108. ace scan Vertical Angle Interval The vertical angle that will be turned between each shot taken during the surface scan HR The rod height which should typically be set to zero since all shots taken are reflectorless no rod Show Outline This will cause the total station to scan the perimeter of the defined surface This is useful to visually check the perimeter of your surface when the laser pointer is activated on the total station Show Unit This will cause the total station to scan a single horizontal vertical interval This is useful to visually check your interval settings when the laser pointer is activated on the total station Next gt Opens Surface Scan Statistics screen Surface Scan Statistics Survey Surface Scan Next gt The Surface Scan Statistics screen displays details about the surface that was just defined Store Pts This box should be checked to store the points that are shot during the surface scan Enter the starting point number in the corresponding field Back Returns to the previous screen Go gt Opens the Surface Scan Results screen Surface Scan Results Survey Surface Scan Next gt Go gt The Surface Scan Results screen contains two cards that detail the progress of the surface scan The Map card shows the points that were shot in green points that have not yet been shot in gray and rejected points in red Stop Results card Will stop the surface scan 90
109. acteristics Add Edit Alignments Job Edit Alignments or Roads Edit Alignments The Add Edit Alignments screen displays a list of all the existing alignments in the current job The right portion of the screen shows a graphic of the horizontal and vertical portion of the selected alignment New Opens the Edit Alignment screen where a new alignment can be created from scratch Edit Opens the Edit Alignment screen where the details of the selected alignment can be edited Delete Used to delete the selected alignment M The power button opens the following routines e Create Points Opens the Create Points screen where points can be stored that coincide with the selected alignment Import RD5 File Opens the Open screen and lists all the RD5 alignment files in the Jobs directory Select the desired file and tap Export RD5 File Opens the Save As screen where the current alignment can be saved to a RDS file Edit Alignment Job Edit Alignments Edit or Job Edit Alignments New The Edit Alignment screen is used to edit an existing alignment or create a new one Edit Alignment Screen HAL Tab The HAL Horizontal ALignment tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the horizontal details of an alignment Insert Opens the Edit Segment screen where a new horizontal alignment segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment Edit Open
110. age Smart Targets Opens the Manage Smart Targets screen where a custom target can be configured 230 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Manage Smart Targets I Manage Smart Targets The Manage Smart Targets screen is used to edit existing custom targets or configure a new custom target type The upper portion of the screen lists all the custom targets that are currently available To select a target tap it from this list The selected target can then be edited deleted or activated Add Opens the Edit Smart Target screen where a new custom target can be created Edit Opens the Edit Smart Target screen where the selected Smart Target can be modified Delete Deletes the selected Smart Target Activate Activates the selected Smart Target The active smart target is marked with the symbol Note It is not necessary to access the Manage Smart Targets screen to activate a different Smart Target You can quickly activate a Smart Target by tapping nd next to any HR field and then tap the desired Smart Target from the list that appears Edit Smart Targets nal Manage Smart Targets Add or Edit The Edit Smart Target screen is used to edit an existing Smart Target or create a new one Name is the desired name for the Smart Target Target Type defines the type of target as being a Prism Reflectorless Long Range which increases the EDM power or On Instrument which uses whichever EDM settings are configured on the total station for
111. al segments that have the P tag will also be adjusted so they will remain tangent to the previous segments This does not hold true for vertical alignment segments Vertical segments will always begin with the specified starting grade unless they are manually modified Azimuth Bearing Used to enter a known azimuth or bearing of the line Adds the line to the current horizontal alignment Edit Segment Arc Horizontal Curve Card The Arc card is used to add a horizontal curve to the alignment The curve can be defined by two of the following e Radius The distance from the radius point to the curve Delta The internal angle from center to tangent points Degree Arc The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft chord length e Length The arc length Chord The chord length Tangent The distance from the PC or PT to the PI e Mid Ord The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Turn Specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the beginning Make this segment tangent to previous When checked the start of the specified curve will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment Azimuth Bearing Used to enter a known azimuth or bearing at the start of the curve Adds the curve to th
112. all computations to be based on a cut slope Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope Topo SS will store the last shot taken as a side shot HR is the rod height lt Back returns to the previous screen Store gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen 5 The fifth screen is used to store a point for the last shot taken from the previous screen which should be located at the catch point Point Name is the name assigned to the stored point Description is the description assigned to the stored point Results This will display the following additional cut fill and location information e Type of slope e g left right cut fill Design and observed slope ratios run over rise e Design and actual stations HD and Cut Fill to Hinge Point HD and Cut Fill to Center Line If applicable HD and Cut Fill to Edge of Pavement and Edge of Curb Name of segment and HD and Cut Fill to that segment extremity Road Slope Stake only Store CP stores the point Offset from CP This field is used if you want to stake another location that is at the specified horizontal distance from the catch point away from the road Solve gt opens a new screen used to stake the point at the offset specified above lt Back returns to the previous screen Next CP gt returns to the third slope staking screen where the station to stake can be advanced and the next catch point can
113. allow inserting or removing of segments The Widenings Card Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Widenings The Widenings card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit widenings A widening is a section of a road that changes in width but does not necessarily require any new templates The road width is adjusted by changing only the width of the first segment of the template that leads into the beginning of the widening Any additional segments like those that may describe a sidewalk or ditch are not adjusted The following rules must be considered when adding a widening to a road e A widening must have a starting station and an ending station or a length Left and right widenings are separate and independent of each other e The start and end stations must occur within the boundaries of the alignment e The starting station must occur before the ending station e The beginning of a widening must match the width of the previous widening or template The end of a widening must match the next template or widening unless it is the last element in the road The beginning or ending of a widening cannot occur within the boundaries of another widening but the beginning of one widening can occur at the same station as the end of a previous widening e Widenings are always positioned by their start station Add when a widening or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Widenings card this button ope
114. amera application and take additional pictures for a point Note When you delete a picture using the menu item the picture is disassociated from this point in the job but the picture file is not removed from the disk To get rid of the actual picture file you must use the file explorer to delete the file Note The camera button is only available on a Nomad or Ranger 3 data collector that has an integrated digital camera Edit Point Location Job Edit Points Edit Location The Location card is used to modify the coordinate of a user entered point or to show the point detail information for any point derived from a survey measurement If the selected point was entered by the user or imported from an external file you can edit the coordinate values Coordinate Type is used to select what kind of coordinate is entered for this point e Grid enter a northing easting elevation coordinate for this point e WGS84 LLH enter a latitude longitude height coordinate in the global geodetic datum for this point Local LLH enter a latitude longitude height coordinate in the local datum for this point If the point was derived from a survey measurement then this card shows point details for the selected point GNSS Control Point Opens up the GNSS Control Point Pair Screen GNSS Control Point Pair Job Edit Points Edit Location GNSS Control Point The GNSS Control Point Pair screen is used to associate a pai
115. asemaps screen described below only available from the main map view accessed from the command bar button The main map and survey routine maps can function as an active map where you can perform COGO and survey functions directly from the map Tap and hold on the map to bring up a context menu where you can pick Active Map functions The main map can function as an active survey map where you can measure and store points directly from the map Tap and hold on the main map to bring up a context menu where you can toggle the map to enter Survey Map functions Active Map View The main map as well as any map on a survey routine will also function as an active map which allows you to perform several actions directly from the map Tap and hold on the map to bring up a context menu of available actions The actions available will depend on what you have selected at the tap and hold location e Point to Point Select a second point to perform an Inverse Point to Point e Point to Location Select a location from the map to perform an Inverse Point to Location Point to Line when a point is selected Select a line to perform an Inverse Point to Polyline or select two additional points to perform an Inverse Point to Line e Corner Angle Select a middle point and then an end point to perform a Corner Angle calculation e Point to Line when a line is selected Select a point to perform an Inverse Point to Polyline e Line to Location Sel
116. ast value in the display or the last two values depending on the operation Each button is explained below where the value in Level 1 is x and the value in Level 2 is y Adds x and y Divides y by x 61 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Subtracts y from x x Multiplies x and y Enter Moves the active value to Level 1 of the stack or duplicates Level 1 if there is no active value Swap Swaps positions of x and y in the stack Drop Drops removes x from the stack Edit Moves the value in Level 1 to the active area where it can be edited Changes the sign of x 1 x Inverse of x pi Enters 3 141592654 to the stack Clr Clears the stack Vx Square root of x Sin7 Arc sine of x Cos Arc cosine of x Tan Arc tangent of x gt dms Converts x in decimal degrees to degrees minutes seconds x Raises x to the power of n x Squares x Sin Sine of x Cos Cosine of x Tan Tangent of x dms gt Converts x in degrees minutes seconds to decimal degrees Ln Natural logarithm base e of x Log Common logarithm base 10 of x gt R Converts x in decimal degrees to radians G gt R Converts x in Grads to radians P gt R Converts the polar coordinates y x to rectangular coordinates dms Subtracts x in degrees minutes seconds from y in degrees minutes seconds x 62 Survey Pro Help 5 00 e Raises 2 718281828 to the power of x 10 Raises 10 to the power of x R gt
117. ation assigned to the beginning of the road End Station displays the final station in the road Use Station Equation When checked the current station equation will be applied to the road Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen where a station equation can be configured Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen Next gt takes you to the next Road Slope Staking screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Road Slope Staking Screen 2 The second Road Slope Staking screen is used to set up some slope stake parameters prior to slope staking the road Station is the station to be slope staked Station Interval specifies how far to advance from the current station to the next station 215 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Next Station advances the current station by the Station Interval Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen lt Back returns to the previous screen H Map Card The H Map card displays information about the horizontal details of the road at the current station Segment Type displays the type of horizontal section at the current station Left Right is the description of the left and right templates that are being used
118. b that the total station will turn to Turn to Point Turns the total station to the specified point Turn to Backsight Turns the total station to the backsight point Flip Quickly rotates the total station from face one to face two or vice versa Sky Plot Survey Remote Control S Sky Plot The Sky Plot screen displays the relative location of the visible satellites in the sky as well as if they are being used to calculate a position Satellites with a usable signal are shown with red flashing indicators The Elevation Mask is the minimum angle above the horizon where locked satellites are used for a solution This area is indicated on the screen by the inner circle GeoLock Settings Survey Remote Control S Settings or Job Settings Instrument GeoLock The GeoLock Settings screen is used to enable disable GeoLock and displays the current setting of the NMEA GPS receiver The GPS receiver settings are configured on the Job gt Settings gt NMEA GPS page Enable GeoLock When checked enables the GeoLock feature Use 3D GeoLock When checked the GPS elevation will also be used to compute your location and adjust the vertical angle of the total station accordingly GPS is generally less precise vertically than horizontally so unless you are using GeoLock while in very steep terrain this item should remain unchecked Surface Scan Survey Surface Scan The Surface Scan screen takes advantage
119. bout the current map zone Select Point Specify a reference point Cale Scale gt Opens Screen Two if Use a single combined scale factor was selected If Use a grid factor with sea level correction was selected you will return to the Scale Settings screen and the computed grid factor will be entered for you Screen Two Ellipsoid Height The height of the ground above the ellipsoid surface lt Back Returns to the previous screen Solve gt Opens Screen Three Screen Three Mapping Plane Scale Factor Displays the scale factor that will correct for the effects of map projection distortion Ellipsoid Scale Factor Displays the scale factor to correct for the geometric effect of your height above the ellipsoid surface Ground to Grid Displays the combined scale factor that will be used for ground to grid calculations Grid to Ground displays the inverse of the combined scale factor for grid to ground calculations 37 Survey Pro Help 5 00 lt Back Returns to the previous screen Solve gt Returns to the Scale Settings screen where the combined scale factor will be entered for you Stakeout Settings The Stakeout Settings card contains the setting that control how stakeout is performed The settings available depend on if you are running in conventional or GNSS mode Stake Corners Not Just Even Intervals When staking by stations locations where a line segment changes such as from a straight s
120. cified It is not necessary to specify the distance units when importing coordinates from a Survey Pro file since those units are written within the file If importing coordinates where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job the imported coordinates will be converted to the current job s distance units when they are imported This is normally the desired result but it can cause a problem if any distance units were set incorrectly This situation can most commonly occur when working with International Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious Usually the difference between International Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible 2 parts per million but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates which are often very large in magnitude the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other If importing coordinates from a source such as an HP 48 where you are not sure if the units are in International Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to International Feet or US Survey Feet you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed To do this be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job Coordinates from a variety of file types can be imported into the current job The first Import screen is used to sel
121. corrections with fixed ambiguities precision is typically within 15 mm Vector Length Displays the length of the vector from base to rover when the solution type is RTK fixed or float If the solution is not a network RTK solution then the PPM value of the vector length is also displayed H Precision Displays the root mean squared RMS error of the horizontal solution reported by the receiver It is displayed in project units V Precision Displays the RMS error of the vertical solution reported by the receiver It is displayed in project units Note This value is supplied by the receiver and the software displays the receiver s value without modification Most manufactures report this value at the 2 or 3 sigma level However since different manufacturers use different statistical methodology it is not necessarily valid to compare the RMS values between brands or even between models with different firmware HDOP Displays the Horizontal Dilution of Precision It is a measure of the geometrical quality of the solution DOP has no units and lower numbers indicate better solution geometry VDOP Displays the Vertical Dilution of Precision It is a measure of the geometrical quality of the solution PDOP Displays the Position Dilution of Precision It is a combination of HDOP VDOP and Time Dilution of Precision It will always be larger than HDOP and VDOP Data Link 101 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Data Link card displays informati
122. ct the point in the point list that is nearest to the previously staked point which is the selected point when the screen if first accessed lt Insert lt Append will insert the point specified in the corresponding field above the point selected in the point list When lt End gt is selected the point is appended to the end of the list Change to is available only when the screen is accessed with the Change Design Point button This is used to stake the point currently selected in the point list Stake to Line Stakeout Stake to Line The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate any location in relation to a predefined line The line can be defined by two points a point and direction a polyline or the centerline of an alignment Distance direction and cut fill information is provided so the rod can locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance a perpendicular offset to the line gt Define Line gt Polyline When set to Define Line shown here a line can be defined by two points or a point and a direction When set to Polyline shown below the line is defined by an existing polyline Start Point defines the first point of the line to be staked gt Point gt Direction defines the second point on the line or the direction of the line to be staked respectively Begin Station defines the station associated with the Start Point Tap Line displays a map of all the poly
123. culate solved coordinates from raw observations Serial Port available when the output method is To Serial Port Select the serial port on the data collector for the external data output This cannot be the same port as the current active instrument conventional or GNSS Baud Rate The baud rate for the external data output port Parity The parity of the external data output port Bluetooth available when the port for external data output is set to Bluetooth Opens the Bluetooth configuration screen where you can quickly check or change Bluetooth settings See the User Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth technology Path available when the output method is To File Shows the location of the saved file To select a different path click Browse 41 Survey Pro Help 5 00 File available when the output method is To File Enter the file name for saving the external data output To select a different file type click Browse Browse available when the output method is To File Click to open a file browse dialog where you can select the file name and path for the output file The default file extension is XML but you can use any extension Buttons Settings The Buttons Settings card is used to customize the function for the physical buttons located on the data collector The upper half of the screen lists all of the customizable button s current assignments A particular button mu
124. current EDM mode HD VD ZA SD Toggles the data displayed from the total station between HA HD and VD or HA ZA and SD Map Card Survey Remote Control Map The Map card displays a live map showing the total station position relative to the current foresight and backsight Aim Card Survey Remote Control Aim The Aim card is used to precisely aim the instrument Tapping around the total station graphic will turn the instrument to the location corresponding to the horizontal and vertical scale bars gt By Angle gt By Distance Toggles between turning by angles or by distances respectively The scales in the scale bars will also switch between angles or distances The scales in the scale bars are calculated using the last distance that was measured Foresight Card Survey Remote Control Foresight The Foresight card is available only if the backsight is solved It displays live coordinates for the current foresight Turn To Survey Remote Control Turn To The Turn To screen is used to turn a robotic total station to a specified horizontal and zenith angle or to a specified point Horizontal Angle The horizontal angle that the total station will turn to Zenith Angle The zenith angle that the total station will turn to 88 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Turn to Angles Turns the total station to the specified horizontal and zenith angles Existing Point The point from the current jo
125. current setup and last shot Note The Results button is only available from the Store Catch Point screen when using GNSS or Remote mode which is accessed after tapping Store gt The button described below selects which information is displayed in the screen from the following options e Vertical Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point Horizontal Map displays an overhead view of the job Shot Data displays the shot data for the last shot The button described below selects the type of slope that will be used from hinge point to the catch point from the following options e Automatic Slope selects the slope that is nearest to the current rod position Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a cut slope e Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope 152 Survey Pro Help 5 00 HR is the rod height Topo SS will store the last shot taken as a side shot Shot takes a shot lt Back returns to the previous screen Store gt opens the next screen Point Slope Staking Screen 3 The third Point Slope Staking screen is identical to the fifth Slope Staking screen
126. current station and section of the roadway being staked and the current line segment type from the polyline that describes the centerline If staking the center and an offset was specified To L or To R is also displayed to indicate if the offset is to the left or right of the centerline respectively Offset displays the offset that is applied to the design point Slope displays the slope of the road at the section being staked From Instrument to Design Point displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point plus offset if specified Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 145 Survey Pro Help 5 00 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the
127. d enough control to solve the calibration the Check GNSS Resection Backsight screen opens Use base as vertical benchmark Check this box if the base is set up on a job point with an accurate elevation to include it for vertical control during calibration Start Now Solves a temporary calibration which allows you to collect data before the calibration is fully solved then opens the Data Collection screen You must collect the required number of control at some point in order to get valid local coordinates for your GNSS data collected points 108 Survey Pro Help 5 00 One Point This will solve a valid calibration using the base point as the horizontal and vertical control point then open the Data Collection screen Note The One Point button appears in place of the Start Now gt button when the conditions for One Point setup are met e You must be in Default Ground Calibration projection mode e You have started a new job with only one point and that point was selected as the base point location e You cannot yet have a coordinate system initialized or solved Occupy Control Setup The Occupy Control Setup screen is used to specify which job point with accurate NEE coordinates you are occupying and if you want to use the point for horizontal and or vertical control in the calibration The assignment of H and or V can be modified later Point Select the existing job point you are occupying H Select this option if the point ha
128. d if a horizontal angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot 39 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Zenith Tolerance A warning message will be displayed if a vertical angle exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot Distance Tolerance A warning message will be displayed if a distance exceeds the tolerance entered here during a repetition shot Shoot Distance To Backsight When checked a distance will be measured to each shot to the backsight When unchecked only the angles are measured Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances When checked distances are not measured during reverse shots Enable Automatic Repetition When checked all remaining shots after the first shot to the backsight and foresight will occur automatically when using a motorized instrument Shooting Sequence Specifies the order that the shots are taken from the following options e BS gt FS FS gt BS Backsight Foresight flop Foresight Backsight e BS gt FS gt BS gt FS Backsight Foresight flop Backsight Foresight e BS BS gt FS FS Backsight flop Backsight Foresight flop Foresight e FS FS gt BS BS Foresight flop Foresight Backsight flop Backsight e FS gt BS BS gt FS Foresight Backsight flop Backsight Foresight e FS gt BS gt FS gt BS Foresight Backsight flop Foresight Backsight e BS BS gt FS FS Backsight flop Backsight flop Foresight flop Foresight flop Date Time Setting
129. d in the Stakeout Settings screen Offset Dist is the perpendicular offset from the specified line to the rod This is the minimum distance that the rod must travel to occupy the line Station is the station on the specified line where the offset occurs relative to the Start Point Shot Data displays the information measured by the total station during the previous shot Cut Fill displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the elevation of the reference line at the nearest perpendicular Note If staking beyond the end points of the reference line or if the reference line is defined by a 2D point no vertical data is computed Meas contains the information measured by the total station during the previous shot Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to Screen 1 Store opens the Store Point screen so you can store the last point that was shot Remote Stake to Line The contents of the Stake to Line screen when running in remote mode is nearly identical to running in non remote mode except the graphic portion of the screen looks and behaves differently Point the data collector toward the total station for proper orientation and the graphic tells you the direction to travel to reach the line in the shortest distance If the Use Manual Updating Remote Control field is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen a Shot button will be available which allows you to manually control w
130. dialog Rename Select to rename the receiver profile Delete Select to delete the selected receiver profile Receiver Communication This dialog appears in serial mode or Bluetooth mode depending on the icon you tap in the Add Receiver dialog Serial mode In serial mode the Receiver Comms screen includes the following Port Select the COM port required to connect to your receiver from the drop down list Baud Rate Select the baud rate required to connect to your receiver from the drop down list Parity Select the parity required to connect to your receiver from the drop down list Defaults Tap to return all the serial port settings to their Survey Pro defaults Autodetect Tap to automatically detect the serial port settings for your receiver Change on Receiver Tap to change the serial port settings on your receiver In order for this to work you must first have the correct serial port settings to communicate with your receiver Bluetooth mode In Bluetooth mode the Receiver Comms screen includes the following Bluetooth Device Select the Bluetooth device associated with your receiver If your receiver is not in the list tap Bluetooth Settings to launch the Windows Bluetooth application and scan for the required Bluetooth receiver When you return to the Communications Settings dialog the Bluetooth device you added to Windows is automatically selected Add Receiver Job Settings GNSS Receivers Add Receiver
131. dicate that the data modem Supports Internet modem 1 Supports both base and rover operations Supports only rover operations I Supports only base operations The fields that appear on the screen change depending on the modem you select Modems connected through a serial cable Baudrate Displays the baud rate the receiver uses to communicate with the modem Parity Displays the parity the receiver uses to communicate with the modem Serial Port Displays the serial port the receiver uses to communicate with the modem 26 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Configure Opens the Modem Serial Comms screen where you can change the settings for communication between the receiver and the data modem Modems where you can set the channel and configure radio settings Serial Port fields Baudrate Displays the baud rate the receiver uses to communicate with the modem Parity Displays the parity the receiver uses to communicate with the modem Serial Port Displays the serial port the receiver uses to communicate with the modem Configure Opens the Modem Serial Comms screen where you can change the settings for communication between the receiver and the data modem Radio Settings fields Channel Displays the last radio channel when applicable Sensitivity Displays the last radio sensitivity when applicable Configure Establishes communication with the radio firmware and opens the Radio Settings screen where you can change the
132. e Auxiliary layer If a point is later stored outside the boundary the selected boundary is automatically unselected Clear Unselect the selected boundary and move it to the Auxiliary layer Breaklines Open the Add Edit Break lines screen where DTM break lines can be added or edited Points Open the Points on DTM Layer screen where the points on the DTM layer can be viewed new points can be imported and existing points can be deleted moved to the Auxiliary layer 3D View Open the 3D View screen where the DTM can be viewed from any angle Layers for Staking DTM Job View DTM Layers The Layers for Staking DTM screen is used to select the non reference DTM layer and an optional layer where invalid objects are stored Select DTM Layer The non reference DTM layer used for stake points that are stored and other objects that exist on the surface you are staking These points will be used to generate a DTM surface to compare to the reference DTM surface Select Auxiliary Layer If this is checked and a point is stored that is located outside the selected DTM boundary the point is automatically stored on the Auxiliary layer If left unchecked a prompt will appear when storing a point outside the boundary where you must specify the layer to store the new point Layer Auxiliary The layer that all points will be stored to if they cannot be stored to the DTM layer Choose Polyline Job View DTM Boundary
133. e Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain The first three and the last screens of this routine are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and Circle Zero buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional method for details Once the centerline of the road is selected and the road profile is defined the fourth Slope Staking screen is used to locate the stake point at the current station Slope Staking Screen 4 The graphic portion of the Horizontal Map and Vertical Map is updated continuously This allows the user at the rover position to watch the movement of the rover in relation to the slope and easily position the rod over the catch point Note You can tap in the graphic portion of the screen to open the graphic in a larger window 172 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Although the graphic portion of the screen is continuously updated the numeric values are not updated until the Shot button is tapped The correct procedure for slope staking in GNSS mode is to use the graphic portion of the screen to locate the catch point as closely as possible and press Shot Once the position is satisfactory you can determine if the rover needs to be moved again GNSS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and
134. e a template can be copied from one folder to the current folder and imported into the job 205 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Edit Template Roads Edit Templates Edit or Roads Edit Templates New The Edit Template screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one All of the segments of the current template are listed in the screen The list shows the name of each segment the horizontal and vertical offsets lengths and the slope Note The length of the first segment must be greater than zero Cut Slope is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is above the level of the hinge point Fill Slope is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is below the level of the hinge point Insert opens the Edit Segment screen where a new segment will be added prior to above the segment selected in the Edit Template screen Note To add a segment to the end of all existing segments furthest away from the centerline be sure lt End gt is selected from the Edit Template screen prior to tapping Insert Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the details of the selected segment can be edited Note The selected segment is shown with a thicker line in the map view in the lower portion of the Edit Template screen Remove removes t
135. e area that the boundary encloses If the boundary is not closed the area is computed as if a line joined the two ends Length is the length of the selected boundary Perimeter is the length of the selected boundary plus any additional length between the two ends of an open boundary Surface Area Cogo Surface Area The Surface Area routine computes the surface area of a best fit flat plane within a selected boundary positioned at any incline You can also optionally compute a volume when a thickness of the surface is provided Note Boundaries containing curves are not supported Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view that defines the boundary of the surface To From provides selection of individual points to define the boundary of the surface The points must be selected in sequence around the boundary so no side of the boundary crosses another Solve computes the area details within the selected boundary and displays them in the Results screen Results Surface Area is the area of the best fit plane encompassed by the selected boundary If the boundary is not closed the area is computed as if a straight line joined the two ends Thickness is the thickness entered on the previous screen used for calculating a volume Volume is the computed volume area of plane x thickness Perimeter is the perimeter length of the selected boundary plus any additional length between the two
136. e current horizontal alignment Edit Segment Spiral Card The Spiral card is used to add a spiral curve to the alignment Radius The radius of the spiral This equals the radius of the horizontal curve tangent to the spiral Length The length of the spiral Turn Specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the beginning 51 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Dir Specifies if the curve runs from TS to SC Tangent to Spiral to Spiral to Curve or CS to ST Curve to Spiral to Spiral to Tangent Make this segment tangent to previous When checked will automatically turn the spiral so the beginning is tangent to the end of the previous segment Azimuth Bearing Used to specify a known azimuth or bearing of the start of the spiral Edit Segment Vertical Grade Card The Vertical Grade card is used to enter a segment with any grade Length The horizontal length of the segment Grade The grade slope of the segment Get Previous Grade Automatically enter a grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment Edit Segment Vertical Curve The Vertical Curve card is used to enter a parabolic vertical curve to the alignment Length is the horizontal length of the vertical curve Start Grade The starting grade of the vertical curve End Grade The ending grade of the vertical curve Get Previous Grade Automatically enter a Start Grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous se
137. e data on the specified layer On different layers by groups will import points alignments and parcels to layers named by the group name for the data in the source file If the group name is an invalid layer name e g it is empty or contains invalid characters the data will be stored to the active layer Next gt opens the second configuration screen Import polylines alignments and parcels When this is checked polylines alignments and parcels will be imported as well as the points When unchecked only the points will be imported Import parcels to the specified layer When this is checked imported parcels will be stored to the selected layer If unchecked parcels will be stored to the layer specified in the previous screen For more information on how parcels are imported consult the User s Manual Point and Line Descriptions You can select what information to use as the description for imported lines and points in the corresponding two fields Lines can either be assigned the name or description from the source file and points can either be assigned the description or code from the source file Back returns to the previous screen Import imports the specified data into the current project A results screen will open listing the details of the imported data Import JobXML Coordinates Points and coordinate system information can be imported from a JobXML file Once a JXL file is selected you will be pro
138. e first GNSS control point collected You collect GNSS measurement on points with known local coordinates and solve a calibration adjustment The calibration adjustment will translate rotate and scale the default map projection s y x into your local coordinates N E Show Details Opens the Projection Details screen where the complete details of the calibration solution reference map projection and Geoid model are displayed Reset Origin Opens the Calibration Set Zone screen where you can enter the parameters of the intermediate mapping plane to be used for the calibration adjustment 118 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note This step is usually not necessary since the intermediate mapping plane is automatically set up by default using the location of the first GNSS control point collected in this job However if the first GNSS control point is far away more than 10km or it is considerably higher or lower 200m you may wish to enter the parameters of the intermediate mapping plane Select Geoid Opens the Select Geoid screen where you can select the geoid model to use with the default ground calibration This button is active only when the intermediate mapping plane is not yet set up To change the geoid once the default mapping plane is setup use the Reset Origin button Solve Calibration Opens the Solve Calibration screen where control points can be selected and the horizontal and vertical calibration are
139. e format Text TXT File when selected the chosen points are exported to an ASCII text file CSV CSV File when selected the chosen points are exported to an ASCII text file that is comma delimited and the file is automatically given a CSV extension LandXML XML File when selected all points and lines in the job are exported to a Land XML file JobXML JXL File when selected all points lines and observation raw data in the job are exported to a JOB XML file Next gt opens the Export Select Points Screen unless exporting to LandXML or to Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW file pair Export Select Points Screen The second Export screen will open for any file type that was selected in the previous screen except LandXML or Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW file pair This screen is used to select the points from the current project that you want to export to the selected file type To From allows you to specify a range of points to export Tap Points allows you to select the points to export by tapping them from a map view D The power button provides additional point selection options which include selecting all control points all non control points and selection by description lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen which depends if the file type selected is survey JOB CR5 TXT or CSV Export survey Coordinates When exporting to another
140. e of the alignment Confirm that each widening start station is less than the corresponding widening s end station e Confirm that one widening does not overlap with another widening e Confirm that the start station for each super elevation is less than the end station Confirm that no two super elevations overlap e Confirm that the start and end of each super elevation either both hinge on the centerline or both hinge on the edge e Confirms all templates widening and super elevations are on the alignment e Confirms no more than one template exists at any particular station on the same side of the road e Confirms the first segment of all templates is greater than 0 e Checks for empty templates e Checks for widenings with zero width e Checks for overlapping parabolic transitions e Checks for template widening width matching e Checks for template super elevation slope matching Road Profiles Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road View Profiles The Road Profiles screen allows you to see information about the cross sectional profile of the road at any station after at least one template has been added to each side of the road lt lt gt gt these buttons move a circle icon that starts at the centerline to each node of the template at the current station Information for the selected segment is displayed in the right portion of the screen The name for the selected segment is shown betw
141. e presented from the rod person s point of view When unchecked it will be presented from the total station s point of view This option only applies when a robotic total station is selected in the Instrument Settings View from Rod to Instrument remote When checked the move left or right information will be presented from the rod person s point of view When unchecked it will be presented from the total station s point of view This option only applies when a non robot total station is selected in the Instrument Settings Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from the routines under the Stakeout menu Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described earlier Note There is no Prompt for Description checkbox as in the Surveying Settings card because you are always prompted for a description when storing a point from a stakeout routine Prompt for Picture When checked a prompt will appear before storing a point where you have the option of taking 38 Survey Pro Help 5 00 one or more pictures associated with the current point Only available when running on a Nomad or Ranger 3 that has a digital camera Use Perfect Stationing When checked staking locations w
142. e preview are acceptable tap this button to perform the adjustment 222 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Miscellaneous Screens Menu The following screens are only available via a Quick Pick or a power button They are not available directly from any menu item Past Results Create Points Edit Description List Trimble Slant HR gt HR Convert Slant HI gt HI Quick Pick Editor Select Points Map View Active Map Survey Map Map Display Options Manage Basemaps Edit Basemaps Smart Targets Manage Smart Targets Edit Smart Targets Main Index Past Results nal Past Results where applicable When the Past Results option is used to enter a value in a specific field that was computed previously within the software Select the line that contains the value that you want to use and tap The selected value will then be entered in the field associated with that power button Create Points Screen Job Edit Alignments Create Point The Create Points screen is used to store points that coincide with specific locations on an alignment Alignment Nodes When checked will store points at locations where a change occurs on an alignment for example where a straight section and a curved section meet Sta Intervals When checked will store a point at the specified station interval along an alignment Start Point Name is the name for the first point that will be stored from this screen Description is the description that w
143. e rod Zj iy Opens the Smart Target options Side Shot Opens the Traverse Now screen where you can choose to observe a new point to traverse to or select a point you have previously occupied from this setup Traverse Triggers the total station to take a shot to the prism The new point is stored as a traverse shot in the data collector and a The Traverse Now screen will open If you choose to traverse now the occupy point will automatically 72 Survey Pro Help 5 00 change to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically change to the previous occupy point Note Prior to storing a point you may then be prompted for description rod height layer and or feature information depending on the selections made in the Surveying Settings screen Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where you can set and check your station occupy point and backsight HA A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Traverse Results Angle Right The horizontal angle right around the Occupy Point from the Backsight to the Foresight Point Azimuth The azimuth from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Zenith The zenith angle measured by the total station to the prism Slope Dist The slope distance measured by the total station to the prism Horz Dist The horizontal distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Vert Dist The vertical distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Point The
144. e selected line or curve from the list Delete deletes the selected line segment Clear clears all line entries Closure opens the Results page Add Line opens the Add Edit Line screen where a new line can be added prior to the select segment Add Arc opens the Add Edit Curve screen where a new curve can be added prior to the selected segment Add to Map opens the Add to Map screen where the map data entered in the list can be added to the current job as a polyline Results Area is the area that the boundary encloses If the start and end points are in different locations the area is computed as if a line joined these two points Length is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point 186 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Perimeter is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point plus any additional length between the last point and the first point Error dist is the distance between the last point and the first point Error azm is the direction from the last point to the first point Precision is the ratio between the Error distance and Perimeter Add Edit Line Cogo Map Check Add Line The Add Edit Line screen is used to enter a new line to the list prior to the selected line segment Azimuth Bearing is the direction of the line Length is the length of the line in feet or meters enters the line to the list closes the screen wit
145. e shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Turn Instrument available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the second screen Stake Next gt returns you to the previous Stake Points screen where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value Instrument Stakeout Instrument Stakeout is a special stakeout option only available when using a Nikon DTM or NPL series total station while the Send Stakeout Data to Instrument option is checked in the Instrument Settings screen When using Instrument Stakeout a new stakeout screen will appear after you tap Stake gt from the Stake Points Screen 2 The stakeout data is then sent to the total station where the controls on the total station are used to stake the point Once you are satisfied with the stake location tap Take Final Shot gt to shoot the final stakeout location and proceed to the Stake Points Screen 3 If you tap Shot from Screen 3 to take another shot you will return to the Instrument Stakeout screen where you can once again use the controls on the total station to stake the point HR is the rod height Update HR on Instrument If a new rod height is entered in the HR field or if a new Smart Target is selected this button sends the new HR information to the total station Take Final Shot gt Once you are satisfied with the stake location this butt
146. e spiral curve The offset occurs on the left while viewing the spiral from the Start Point when the L is selected or on the right when R is selected Note An offset of zero would result in the spiral curve itself being staked V Offset will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change 157 Survey Pro Help 5 00 the cut fill values accordingly Design elevations will be lower when is selected and higher when U is selected Grade specifies a slope from the spiral curve to the curve that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the spiral curve as the Offset value increases Height of rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Station Setup screen lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the third screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing Solve gt depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Stake Spiral and Offset Screen 3 Station displays the current station that is being staked H Offset displays the offset distance of the spiral curve being staked from the specified spiral curve and if it is on the Right or Left side of the specified spiral curve Angle Right is the horizontal angle that the total station mu
147. e spiral intersects with the tangent CS gt ST Adding a Vertical Curve Tap the Parabolic Curve tab Apply Curve Checked to enter a vertical at curve Grade at EVC BVC is the known grade at either the end of vertical curve or beginning of vertical curve The grade entered here is determined by the selection made in the Auto Compute field Auto Compute Automatically compute the grade at the selected point and display it on the screen The grade at the point that is not checked here must be specified in the field defined above Edit Alignments The Edit Alignments screen is used to create and edit alignments which can then be used with routines such as Offset Staking Offset Points Offset Lines and Road Layout Alignments are used to describe all of the horizontal and vertical details of a road s centerline An alignment does not 48 Survey Pro Help 5 00 use existing points to define any particular locations on the alignment although a point can be used to anchor the starting location which is the same location for both the horizontal and vertical parts of the alignment Any location on an alignment where a change occurs is called a node An alignment can contain straight sections grades horizontal vertical and spiral curves The horizontal and vertical portions of an alignment are defined separately and independently but they are both combined within the software to create a single alignment with horizontal and vertical char
148. e the rover must move in a south or north direction to reach the design point Go EAST WEST displays the distance the rover must move in an east or west direction to reach the design point Note The Display Directions As field in the Stakeout Settings screen configures the format for the text that directs you to the design point CUT FILL displays the required cut or fill between the current elevation and the design point Ref 0 00 00 opens a screen where you can select a reference azimuth or point which will then be displayed on the navigation graphic as a blue line to assist in orienting yourself When Auto Snap to Reference When Close is checked in this screen and when using the navigation method the navigation method will automatically switch to the method when you are within 3 meters of the design point Checking this box while in using the navigation method has no effect gt OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Topo SS allows you to store a side shot measurement during stake out This button behaves like the Topo SS button on the data collection page The RMS and type of the current solution is checked against the criteria and if acceptable you a
149. e used to backup or restore all the files associated with the current job The routine also gives you the option of storing a snapshot of a customized map view to the archive This can then be used to visually identify an archive Any number of backups can be created for a particular job All the existing backups for the current job are listed in the main Backup Restore screen along with other information including the date the backup was created the number of files stored in the archive and if the archive includes a snapshot Archives that include a snapshot are shown with a icon while those without a snapshot have a amp icon A new empty archive has a icon All of the backups for a particular job are physically stored to a single compressed file located in the Survey Pro Jobs directory on the data collector This file will have the same filename as the current job only the Backup extension is appended to the name For example the backups for a job with a filename of Smith survey will be stored in a file called Smith survey Backup New Archive opens the New Archive screen where a name is entered for the new backup archive being created Once created an empty archive will be listed in the main Backup Restore screen which can then be selected to backup the current job Delete Archive opens a prompt asking if you are sure If you select Yes at the prompt the archive selected from the main Backup Restore screen
150. ect from the file types listed below The next screen that opens depends on the selection made here e Survey Files survey import coordinates from a Survey Pro version 5 file e Job Files JOB import coordinates from a Survey Pro version 4 file e Coordinate Files CR5 import coordinates from a CR5 coordinate file Text Files TXT text files can contain coordinates in several different possible formats The Import ASCII Wizard is used to define the format of the text file being imported e Text Files CSV this is a simplified text file import routine where the source file is comma delimited and has a CSV extension e LandXML Files xml imports points alignments polylines and parcels from a LandXML file e JobXML Files jxl imports points and coordinate system from a JobXML file Import Survey Pro version 5 survey Coordinates When importing coordinates from another survey file the Import screen is used 10 Survey Pro Help 5 00 A list of all the survey files available in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you want to import and then tap the button The points in the selected job will be added to the points in the current job Import Survey Pro version 4 JOB Coordinates When importing coordinates from another JOB file the Import screen is used A list of all the jobs available in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you wan
151. ect a location to perform an Inverse Location to Polyline e Location to Point Select a point to perform an Inverse Point to Location e Location to Location Select a second location to perform an Inverse Location to Location e Location to Line Select a line to perform an Inverse Location to Polyline 227 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Stake to Point Opens up the Stake Point screen conventional mode the Remote Staking screen robotic mode or the GNSS Stake Point screen GNSS mode where the selected point can be staked e Stake to Line when a point is selected Select a second point to define the line then opens the Stake to Line Conventional screen conventional mode or the Stake to Line GNSS screen GNSS mode e Stake to Line when a line is selected Opens the Stake to Line Conventional screen conventional mode or the Stake to Line GNSS screen GNSS mode e Stake to Location Opens up the Stake Location screen conventional mode the Remote Staking screen robotic mode or the GNSS Stake Point screen GNSS mode where the selected location can be staked e Create Point Opens up the New Point screen where you can create a new point at the selected 2D location e Show Results Opens up a results view of all of the active map results generated for this instance of the map view e Clear Selection Clears the active map results from the map view and resets the selection of points and or lines in the active map Survey Map View
152. ection to a curve will also be staked when this is checked Stake Bisector of Non tangent Corners When staking an offset to a centerline that contains a corner this option when checked will stake the corner point where the two offsets intersect Always Start Stakeout With Coarse Mode When checked the EDM mode toggle button found in all stakeout screens will initially be set to coarse mode fast shot This instructs the total station to measure distances faster but with slightly less accuracy Use Manual Updating Remote Control When checked a Shot button in the stakeout screens must be tapped to take a shot When this not checked shots are continuously taken in the stakeout screens This is only valid when running in remote mode using a robotic total station Design Elevation from Offset Segment Determines where the cut fill value is computed from in the Offset and Road Stakeout screens when the Offset checkbox is checked and a non zero offset is entered When checked the cut fill value is calculated from the design elevation of the node you are staking to When unchecked the cut fill value is calculated from the design elevation at the specified offset location Note If the specified offset extends beyond the end of the road profile the cut fill value is always computed from the design elevation of the node you are staking to View from Instrument to Rod non remote When checked the move left or right information will b
153. ed to define a particular part of the road The Road Card Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road The Road card of the New Road screen is used to select the alignment to use for the road Road Name is the name assigned to the road The name must not be the same as any existing road name Alignment Description displays the name of the selected alignment Choose Alignment opens the Choose Alignment screen where an existing alignment can be selected Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen 208 Survey Pro Help 5 00 View Profiles opens the Road Profiles screen where you can see information about the cross sectional profile of the road at any station Set POB opens the Road Alignment Properties screen where information about the current alignment can be changed Roads Report Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road Check The Roads Report screen displays a list of any errors after performing the following tests e Confirm that the alignment contains both a HAL and a VAL e Confirm that the horizontal length of the VAL is greater than or equal to the HAL e Confirm there is at least one template for each side of the road e Confirm the first template coincides with the starting station Confirm that all template segments have a name The names do not have to be unique e Confirm that the same number of segments exist on each sid
154. ed to select a particular polyline or alignment that defines a centerline Separate overhead and side views are displayed for the selected polyline Simply select the desired line and tap Stake DTM Screen 2 Stakeout Stake DTM Next gt The second Stake DTM screen displays all relevant information for the current rod position and a graphic that shows 162 Survey Pro Help 5 00 the reference DTM surface and its corners Once a shot is taken the rod location and the occupied TIN triangle are displayed Data shows the angle and distance information from the previous shot Result shows the current northing easting and elevation of the rod as well as the computed elevation of the reference DTM at the current location and the cut or fill necessary to bring the elevation at the current location to the elevation of the reference DTM at the current location Note If the DTM and Cut or Fill fields are blank after taking a shot it indicates the rod is outside the reference DTM boundary Centerline shows the current station and offset information for the rod location relative to the centerline selected from the previous screen The type of line segment in the polyline or alignment at the current station is also displayed This card is only available if the With Centerline checkbox was checked in the first Stake DTM screen Note Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger map view with zoom controls Point is the p
155. een is a map view that is used to configure the map as desired and the resulting image will be saved in the archive as a snapshot along with the job files OK will create the archive along with a snapshot of the map as it is configured on the screen x Cancel will create the backup archive without a snapshot Backup Restore Restore When restoring the job files from an archive the archived files will replace the existing files of the current job Warning If you do not want to lose any new data that was collected after the archive being restored was created you should first backup the current job to a new archive before restoring an older archive lt Back will return to the previous screen Restore will restore the backed up job from the selected archive The current job is then deleted and replaced by the backup job Transfer File Transfer The Transfer screen allows you to transfer files between the data collector and another device running the survey software Connecting to specifies which device you are communicating with from the following options HP48 if you are connecting to a Hewlett Packard HP48 calculator e Husky if you are connecting to a Husky FS series data collector e Survey Pro WM WinCE if you are connecting to a Windows device running Survey Pro e Windows PC if you are connecting to a personal computer that is running Windows CE Services COM Port specifies which COM port
156. een these buttons Go opens a screen where a specific station can be entered Once Gis tapped the profile at the entered location is shown in the Road Profiles screen Prof opens the Details screen and lists several details about the road s cross sectional profile at the current station 209 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Seg opens the Details screen and lists information related to the selected segment at the current station Road Alignment Properties Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road Set POB The Road Alignment Properties screen is used to change information about the current alignment Description is the name of the current alignment A new name can be assigned to the alignment from this field Point Location depending how this button is toggled you can change the POB of the alignment by entering a new point number or new coordinates Start Station replaces the existing starting station of the alignment with the starting station entered here The Templates Card Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Templates The Templates card of the New Road screen is used to add existing templates to the road The screen displays a list of left and right templates that are currently assigned to the road When a particular template is selected a cross sectional profile view of the selected template is displayed and an overhead view shows where the selected template occurs on the ali
157. eflectorless total station where a direct measurement to the point is not possible but two points on two intersecting lines can be shot Foresight The name of the point that will be stored Description The description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 Shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Shoot Line 1 Prompts you to take two shots on Line 1 which intersects with Line 2 at the point you want to store Note Each shot for a line can be in any location on the same line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 Shoot Line 2 Prompts you to take two shots on Line 2 which intersects with Line 1 at the point you want to store Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap to accept the computed elevation 80 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen you can set and check your station occupy point and backsight Corner amp Angle Survey Corner amp Angle The Corner and Angle screen is used to store a point that cannot be shot on a reference line using a reflectorless total station where two other points on the same line can be shot Foresight The name of the point that will be stored Description The description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 Shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are
158. eiver s estimation of the percent quality of the radio link Dial Dials the cell phone or IP modem using the configuration set in the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem Settings screen respectively Hang up Disconnects the cell phone or IP modem connection Post Process The Post Process card displays information about GNSS raw data logging for post processing Note Some GNSS receivers monitor post processing session status while others simply record event markers in the log file If your receiver does not monitor sessions some fields are not displayed 102 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Status displays information about the recording It will be one of four values No Communication Not receiving a response to commands e No Data Receiving an unknown or a bad response to commands Recording A file on the receiver or in the data collector is open and recording GNSS raw data If this receiver monitors sessions this field will display session in progress when a session is ongoing e Not Recording No file is open and there is no raw data recording Last Site ID Displays the Site ID of the current session if a session is in progress If your receiver does not monitor sessions the Site ID is the last Site ID used by the software Interval Displays the current recording interval set in the receiver Remaining Displays the time remaining in the current session if a session is in progress This field only shows when your recei
159. elect a point for calibration origin Select this option if you wish to override the default behavior of using the centroid of the control coordinates as the origin You will need to assign an origin point below Origin Point Enter a point for the calibration origin This point must be one of the active horizontal control points Key in parameters The Key in parameters screen is used to input calibration horizontal and vertical parameters by hand This can be done to copy a calibration solution between data collectors in the field or to recreate a calibration solution from a raw data printout Horizontal Card The Horizontal card is used to manually enter the six parameters of the horizontal calibration solution Scale Enter the scale factor Rotation Enter the rotation angle Translation N E Enter the horizontal shift N E from the intermediate map projection to the local coordinate system Origin N E Enter the origin location in intermediate mapping plane coordinates of the scale and rotation point Vertical Card The Vertical card is used to manually enter the five parameters of the vertical calibration solution Slope N Enter the slope of the inclined plane along the local north grid axis in parts per million Slope E Enter the slope of the inclined plane along the local east grid axis in parts per million 121 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Separation Enter the separation between the inclined plane and the local elevat
160. emperature inputs Raw Data Edit Target Job View Raw Data Edit Target The Raw Data Edit Target screen allows you to edit the conventional target and height of rod HR Enter the height of rod Add Offset Enter any vertical offset for the height of rod Prism Constant Enter the prism constant in millimeters Select Observations Select the survey observations that you wish to apply this edit to Select All Select all of the observations currently using this target record Unselect All Clears the selection of observations 54 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note If you selected the target record to edit from the root of the record tree by default all observations that use that target will be updated with the new target If you selected the target record to edit from an individual observation by default only that observation s target will be updated Raw Data Edit GNSS Base Job View Raw Data Edit GNSS Base The Raw Data Edit GNSS Base screen allows you to edit the GNSS base setup Base Point Enter the base point for this setup Note If you wish to change the base setup point you can only choose a user entered point key in or imported If you wish to use a point derived from a survey measurement you must first go to the Edit Points screen and insert a copy of that point Note To edit the antenna height for the base setup tap and hold on the antenna record under the GNSS base record and choose Edit GNSS
161. en 2 Roads Menu Index Main Index Add Edit Templates Roads Edit Templates The Add Edit Templates screen is used to edit an existing template or create a new template Templates describe the cross sectional profile of a roadway They can contain information such as the road width its slope a curb and or a ditch Each separate portion of a template is called a segment All templates must have at least one segment and all templates of a particular road must have the same number of segments Any template can describe either the left or right side of the road s cross section they re reversible If a road s left and right side are identical only one template needs to be created the other side can use the same template or be mirrored later when the road is defined All of the saved templates are listed displayed in this screen including each template s name number of segment cut slope and fill slope An image of the selected segment is also displayed in this screen New opens the New Template screen where a new template can be created This screen is identical to the Edit Template screen except most the buttons are initially deactivated Edit opens the Edit Template screen where the selected template can be edited Copy opens the Save As screen where a copy of the selected template can be saved with a different name Delete deletes the selected template Import opens the Open screen wher
162. en automatically The first two screens of the routine are part of the Windows Mobile Pictures amp Video application The second screen is used to preview the picture You must tap ok or press Enter on the data collector button to continue to the final screen If the picture is unacceptable you can cancel from the third screen and start over Note The options available from the bottom of this screen are part of the Windows Mobile Pictures amp Video application and are not supported in the software The third screen is used to name and describe the picture New Picture File Name Enter the picture name here The previous name entered will initially be entered in this field for you except the number will be advanced by one 63 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Point Associated with Picture You can specify an existing point in this field to associate the picture with the specified point Raw Data Note Any text entered here will be stored to the job as a note along with the picture details can be used to cancel out of the routine without saving the picture Saves the picture and closes the routine 64 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Survey Menu The Survey Menu contains the routines used for collecting data with a conventional or robotic total station Station Setup Check Setup Traverse Sideshot Index Repetition Shots Multiple Sideshots Radial Sideshots Distance Offsets Horizontal Angle Offset Vertical Angle Offset Auto
163. ends of an open boundary Angle of Plane is the angle from the horizontal ground to the best fit plane Residuals Shows how well each point in the boundary fit within the computed best fit plane A value of zero represents a perfect fit 185 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Triangle Solutions Cogo Triangle Solutions The Triangle Solutions screen will solve for the unknown parts of a triangle after providing three known parts Triangle Solution is where you select the parts of the triangle that are known You can select any of the following from the dropdown list e Side Side Side The lengths of all three sides are known e Angle Side Angle Two angles and the side between them are known e Side Angle Angle Two angles and one side that does not lie between those angles are known e Side Angle Side Two sides and the angle between them are known e Side Side Angle Two sides and one angle that is not between those sides are known Solve will solve for the unknown parts of the triangle Results Side a b c displays the length of each side Angle A B C displays the corresponding angle Area displays the area of the triangle in square feet and acres or in square meters and hectares Map Check Cogo Map Check The Map Check screen is used to manually enter boundaries from a map to check for closure and other information related to the boundary Edit opens the appropriate editor screen where you can edit th
164. er Select Base Point at Rover GNSS Resection Backsight Occupy Control Set Up Occupy Control Point Check GNSS Resection Backsight Occupy Check Setup Occupy Check Point Solve Calibration Results Start Survey Solve Calibration Index GNSS Resection Backsight Occupy Control Set Up Occupy Control Point Check GNSS Resection Backsight Occupy Check Setup Occupy Check Point Solve Calibration Results GNSS Status Contents GNSS Status Receiver Card Data Link Card Cell IP Modem Card Post Process Card Sky View Card Sat Info Card Position Card 99 Survey Pro Help 5 00 GNSS Data Collection Contents Data Collection Traverse Base Feature Collection Offset Shots Occupy Data Points Control Points Contents Control Points Check Control Point Occupy Control Point Projection Contents Projection Default Ground Calibration Mode Calibration Set Zone Mapping Plane Select Coordinate System Key In Zone Ground Coordinates Projection Details Solve Calibration Select Database Projection Calculator Contents Projection Calculator Rotation Scale Height Correction Scale GNSS Status Survey GNSS Status The GNSS Status screen contains several index card format screens providing real time status of the active receiver Receiver The Receiver card displays information about the receiver mode and GNSS solution quality 100 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Mode Displays if the receiver is set to
165. erent elevation Foresight The point name that will be used when storing the new point Description The description for the offset shot that is stored Shoot Prism Take a shot to the prism Aim Zenith Read the vertical angle measured by the total station which should be facing the new point s location Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen A A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Auto Collect 78 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Survey Auto Collect The Auto Collect screen allows users with robotic total stations to automatically collect points either at a specified time interval or after the rod has moved a specified horizontal distance Note This routine only works when used with a robotic total station in remote control mode Foresight The point name that will be used when storing the first new point Each successive point name will automatically be incremented by the next available point number Description The description that will be assigned to all the points that are stored from this routine Time When this radio button is selected a point will automatically be stored after each time specified in the corresponding field passes Distance When this radio button is selected a point will automatically be stored each time the prism is moved from the last stored point by the horizontal distance specified in the corresponding field Note The accuracy that a point will be stored when auto collecting by
166. etooth GPS receiver and Bluetooth is selected for the Serial Port Accesses the Bluetooth configuration screen where you can quickly check or change Bluetooth settings See the User s Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth Baud Rate The speed that communication takes place This must match the baud rate set in the GPS receiver Parity This must match the parity set in the GPS receiver usually None Shared GPS Shortcut to the Ay gt Settings gt GPS screen You can get more information while viewing this screen by tapping Aw then Data Out settings The Data Out Settings card is used to configure settings for exporting data to a serial port or file Enable Data Out When selected enables export of external data output to a serial port or to a file To Serial Port Select to export data to the serial port on the data collector You must enter the Serial Port Baud Rate and Parity If you select Bluetooth as the serial port you can check or change the Bluetooth settings To File Select to export data to a file You must enter the output file name Send Point Coordinates Select to export point coordinates For conventional surveys the plane N E Elev coordinates for each stored point are exported For GNSS surveys the plane N E Elev and geodetic Lat Lng Ht coordinates for each stored point are exported Send Observations Select to export setup and observation records This will enable you to cal
167. ew Opens the New Layer screen where a new layer can be added You are prompted for a name and if the new layer should be visible Edit Opens the Edit Layer screen where the selected layer can be edited The layer name and visibility can be changed Note You can toggle layer visibility by tapping on the Visible column of the layer list Delete Delete the selected layer Note Only layers that contain no objects can be deleted Layer 0 is required and cannot be deleted or renamed Tip To move several points from one layer to another select the desired points in the Edit Points screen and tap Edit Select the layer you want to move them to and tap Job Information Job Job Info The Job Information screen displays details of the current job and allows you to remove wasted space in the current 60 Survey Pro Help 5 00 job file Filename Displays the current job file name Feature Code File Displays the feature code filename used in the current job Folder Displays the directory where the current job file is located Size Displays the size of the current job Created Displays the date that the current job was created Points Displays the first and last point names and if alphanumeric point names are being used Lines Displays the number of polylines and alignments that are in the current job Roads Displays the number of roads in the current job and the filenames associated with them Basemaps Display
168. existing menu item at this location will be moved down You can tap and hold on the home screen to bring up a context menu to customize the placement of items and pages of the home screen The menu allows you to e Move Item Places the home screen in edit mode and you can move items to a different location including to a different page of the home screen e Remove Item Removes the selected menu item from the home screen e Insert Page Before Adds a new home screen page before the current page You can have a maximum of four pages on your home screen e Insert Page After Adds a new home screen page after the current page You can have a maximum of four pages on your home screen e Remove Page Removes the current page from the home screen If the current page has items on it you will be prompted before you can remove it You can not remove the last page of the home screen Survey Pro Help 5 00 Main Menu The Main Menu is the starting point where all the other screens described in this manual are accessed The area at the bottom of the screen is called the command bar The small buttons in the command bar are used as follows Map View Opens a Map View of the current job can be displayed by tapping the 41 button Surveying Mode The instrument icon indicates which collection mode the software is running in There are three possible surveying modes e Conventional e RTK GNSS e Post Processing GNSS Tapping this icon will open
169. f the backsight target Send Circle Sends the Backsight Circle for this setup to the instrument Next gt Advances to the Check Setup This button shows up when you are using check backsight as part of the station setup work flow Finish Records the setup and exits the wizard This button only shows up when you have Skip Check during Station Setup checked on the Surveying card of the Job Settings pages Check Setup This screen is used to verify the backsight by measuring the distance between the occupy point and the backsight point or taking a measurement to a third point Check Type Select the method to check the backsight You can choose between By Angle By Distance and By Point By Angle Use this method to check the current backsight circle compared to the set backsight circle By Distance Use this method to check the distance between the occupy point and the backsight point plus the current backsight circle compared to the set backsight circle By Point Use this method to measure to a third point and check the closure to that point Check Triggers the instrument to take a measurement appropriate for the check type you are performing Traverse Sideshot Survey Traverse Sideshot The Traverse Sideshot screen is the main screen used for data collection Foresight The point name that will be used for the next stored point Description The description for the next stored point HR The height of th
170. f you have a feature code loaded you can also add Attributes Polyline Editor Once the initial points are selected for the current polyline the third screen allows you to modify the polyline and define any curve and grade information for the polyline sections Selecting any point in the left column of the screen will select that point and the line segment that follows it up to the next point The selected section is then highlighted in the map portion of the screen Any edits will occur on the selected section Remove Remove the selected point and the line segment that follows it The previous line segment will be automatically joined to the following point The change will only be saved if you then tap Tapping will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Clear All Completely removes the current polyline The change will only be saved if you then tap Tapping x will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Curves Opens the fourth screen described below where a horizontal vertical or spiral curve can be added to the selected polyline segment Horizontal Vertical Toggles between showing the map in a Horizontal overhead view or a Vertical side view lt Insert Insert a point or a group of points in front of the selected point The change will only be saved if you then 47 Survey Pro Help 5 00 tap Tapping will return to the previous screen without saving the c
171. figure rover antenna The backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Stake Points for comparison There are two navigation methods available when staking a point and you can switch between them by tapping the button in the top right corner of the navigation graphic When using the method a large red arrow indicates the direction of travel and always appears at the top of the graphic This arrow will dim when at a standstill or when near the design point A north and south indicator are displayed on the graphic and will rotate depending on your direction of travel along with a blue line that indicates the direction to your reference point or azimuth When you are near the design point the graphic will change and the N S indicator will stop updating to assist you in more precisely locating the design point When using the method your reference point or azimuth will always appear at the top of the screen and that is the direction you should be facing while navigating Like with the other navigation method the graphic will change as you get closer to the design point GNSS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical 170 Survey Pro Help 5 00 precision computed by the receiver When this area of the screen is tapped the epoch count stops and the GNSS Status screen opens Go SOUTH NORTH displays the distanc
172. fix them choices are e 99 0 e 99 9 Settings for Topcon Javad Receivers If the current profile is for a Topcon Javad receiver the general page also shows the following settings Co Op Tracking Set the common loops mode of the receiver For more information on common loops mode see http www topcongps com images coop_tracking pdf There are two choices Off e On Multi Path Reduction Set to use C A code phase multipath and C A carrier phase multipath reduction This feature is only applicable if your receiver has the _MRP option enabled There are two choices Off e On Confidence Level Set the statistical criteria to use in the RTK engine s fixed ambiguity resolution algorithm The settings of Low Medium and High correspond to confidence levels of 95 99 5 and 99 9 respectively There are three choices Low e Medium e High Note It is recommended you set this value to High This will usually mean the RTK engine may take longer to resolve a fixed position It might even mean not being able to resolve a fixed solution in some situations However the consequence of a lower confidence level is that it makes it more likely to resolve an incorrect fixed ambiguity The results of using an incorrect fix are usually much worse than the results of using a float solution Antenna Set the source for antenna input There are two choices Internal External 31 Surve
173. g Screen 2 Offset Staking Screen 3 Offset Staking Screen 4 Offset Staking Screen 5 Offset Staking Screen 6 Offset Staking Stakeout Results Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Slope Staking Index Slope Staking Slope Staking Screen 2 Slope Staking Screen 3 Slope Staking Screen 4 Slope Staking Screen 5 Slope Staking Offset Stake Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Point Slope Staking Index Point Slope Staking Point Slope Staking Screen 2 Point Slope Staking Screen 3 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake Line amp Offset Index Stake Line and Offset Stake Line and Offset Screen 2 Stake Line and Offset Screen 3 Stake Line and Offset Summary 136 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake Curve amp Offset Index Stake Curve and Offset Stake Curve and Offset Screen 2 Stake Curve and Offset Screen 3 Stake Curve and Offset Summary Stake Out Point Store Tape Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake Spiral amp Offset Index Stake Spiral and Offset Stake Spiral and Offset Screen 2 Stake Spiral and Offset Screen 3 Stake Spiral Summary Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Show Station amp Offset Index Show Station and Offset Show Station and Offset Screen 2 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Store Offset Points Index Store Offset Points Store Offset Points Screen 2 Store Offset Points Screen 3 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake DTM Index Stake DTM Choo
174. gment Auto Linework Job Auto Linework The Auto Linework screen is used to display the current state of active feature coded auto linework The list of current lines shows e Code The code string defining the linework e Status The status of the line indicating the current and pending linework control state e Points A list of the points currently used for this line View Opens up the View Polyline screen where you can view all of the segments making up the selected line View Raw Data Job View Raw Data The View Raw Data screen displays the raw observation data of the current job You can use this screen to attach a note to the job or to any specific record You can also edit certain raw records and reprocess the job coordinates 52 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The raw data is displayed in a tree view with the root nodes of the tree showing a record of each survey action taken in the current job You can expand a tree node by tapping on the next to the node or double tapping on the node This will show you the individual fields of the selected record You can navigate through the raw data view using the navigation buttons e Up Navigate to the beginning of the records e Down Navigate to the end of the records e Left Navigate to the previous record in your navigation history e Right Navigate to the next record in your navigation history Find Point Opens up the Find Point screen where you
175. gnment Add when a template or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Templates card this button opens the Add Template screen which allows you to add a new template to the same side of the road that was selected Edit allows you to edit the selected template in the Edit Template screen which is identical to the Add Template screen Remove removes the selected template from the list Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described above Add Edit Template Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Templates Add or Edit The Add Edit Template screen allows you to add a template to the road or edit an existing template Template The Template column lists all the templates that can be added to the road Selecting a template will display an image of that template in the lower corner of the screen Once the first template is added this box will only list templates with the same number of segments as the first Start Sta is the location of the template on the alignment Check opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors New opens the New Template screen which is identical to the Edit Template screen where a new template can 210 Survey Pro Help 5 00 be created Edit opens the Edit Template screen where the selected template can be modified although accessing the templates editor from here will not
176. gured within the total station PIN applicable only when using Bluetooth with a Recon or Ranger 500X and a supported total station The Personal Identification Number that was entered in the total station These numbers must match for successful communications Bluetooth applicable only when using Bluetooth with a Recon or Ranger 500X and a supported total station 23 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Opens the Bluetooth configuration screen that comes with the Bluetooth driver software where you can quickly check or change the virtual COM port and favorites Note See the User Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth with a Recon or Ranger 500X and supported total station Defaults Set the Serial Port Baud Rate and Parity to their default values based on the selected total station Instrument Settings Opens the settings that are specific for the selected total station See Notice Send to Instrument applicable only to specific total stations Sends the selected instrument settings to the total station This is particularly useful with robotic total stations after the total station has been reset NOTICE The settings that are available after tapping the Instrument Settings button in non leveling mode directly control the settings that are built into the selected total station Since total station manufactures release new models every year we cannot maintain the necessary set up documentation for every existing
177. h GPS You can occupy a nearby point with the GNSS rover and then measure the offset distance and direction with tape and compass or take a shoot with a laser range finder Offset Point The point name of the offset point to be stored Description The description of the offset point to be stored gt Azimuth gt Bearing The direction or bearing from the occupied point to the offset point Direction from Two Points Used to compute the azimuth or bearing from the reference point to the offset point by occupying a second reference point on line with the offset point Once tapped a prompt opens for the name to store the reference point followed by the Occupy Data Points screen After measuring the coordinate at the on line point you will return to the Offset Shots screen where you will be prompted to pick the direction to the offset point gt Zenith gt Vertical Dist Enter the zenith angle or vertical distance from the occupied point to the offset point Slope Dist Horizontal Dist Enter the slope distance or horizontal distance from the occupied point to the offset point Occupy GPS Occupy the GNSS reference point A prompt for the name of the GPS reference point is followed by the Occupy Data Points screen After measuring the coordinate at the occupied point you will return to the Offset Shots screen where new points can be stored with a direction and distance from the occupied point Shoot Laser Triggers the selec
178. h display Grid Set the position display to show Grid north east and elevation This option is only available when you have a coordinate system selected and solved 104 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Starting a Survey Start Survey at Base Survey Start Base When you are starting a survey at your own RTK base select the Start Base menu item You will first be prompted to select a receiver with the Connect to Base screen Connect to Base The Connect to Base screen is used to select a base receiver to connect to and to pick the format for base corrections The display of the receivers to select list is identical to the Receiver Settings screen Below the list of receivers the modem type of the selected receiver is displayed Depending on the modem type additional settings may be displayed For Broadcasting Radio Modems Correction Format Is where you select the correction format of the base receiver broadcast The formats available will depend on your brand and model Use CMR Station Index Set a CMR station index if you are using a CMR type correction format For Internet Modems Select Network Is where you select the network to use When you select a network the address port and correction format used by the network will be displayed Connect gt Connects to the selected receiver and advanced to the Set Base Receiver screen Note If you have not already selected your projection mode you will be prompted to do so with the P
179. hanges Note if lt End gt is selected in the list the lt Insert button will change to an lt Append button to indicate that additional points will be appended to the end of the list Add Edit Curve The fourth screen is used to modify a selected polyline segment that occurs between two points A horizontal vertical and or spiral curve can be applied to the polyline segment Adding a Horizontal Curve Tap the Arc Spiral tab Curve Set to Arc to enter a horizontal curve Radius Delta Degree Arc Degree Chord Allows you to specify the radius of the curve using a variety of methods Turn Specifies if the curve turns toward the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and face the end point Arc Specifies if the arc of the curve is Small less than 180 or Large greater than 180 Adding a Spiral Tap the Arc Spiral tab Curve Set to Spiral to enter a spiral curve Radius The radius of the spiral curve The same radius of the circular curve adjacent to the spiral Length The length of the spiral measured along the curve from the TS to the SC Turn Specifies if the spiral curve turns to the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and face the end point Direction Specifies if the curve runs from where the tangent intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the curve TS gt SC or if the curve runs from where the curve intersects with the spiral toward where th
180. hat has the worst residual Note A set can only be tossed when three or more sets have been collected Side Shot Use the repetition data gathered to create a new side shot point The foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Traverse Use the repetition data gathered to create a new traverse point The occupy point will automatically update to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically update to the previous occupy point Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where the current backsight can be modified a A shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Multiple Sideshots Survey Multiple Sideshots The Multiple Sideshots screen is used to perform multiple side shots using any number of repetitions to each foresight without the need to re shoot the backsight Foresight The point name that will be stored Description The description for the next stored point HR The length of the rod Zj v1 Opens the Smart Target options Number of Sets The desired number of sets to shoot to the backsight or foresight Shoot Backsight Used to shoot the backsight You will be required to shoot the number of sets to the backsight entered in the Number of Sets field Note The backsight can be re shot at any time but it must be shot before the first side shot can be shot Side Shot Used to shoot a side shot Once the final set is complete the ne
181. he data collector Import Opens the Import Road screen where a road file can be imported into the existing job You can import two types of road file into the job e Survey Pro road files RDS can be imported into the current job These road files will be added to the job file and can be edited and modified using the Edit Roads functions e Land XML files XML can be loaded in the current job Land XML files with roads will be loaded into Survey Pro and can be used in any road staking routine However Land XML roads cannot be edited with the Edit Roads functions nor will they be saved in the job file so you will have to reload the road if you close and reopen the job 207 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note There are some limitations on the Land XML road elements that are supported in Survey Pro Only one CrossSectSurf element is allowed to be defined at each template Only clothoid spirals are supported Curve Spiral Curve is support for road alignments only other alignments will turn the spiral into a straight line segment Only PVI ParaCurve and UnsymParaCurve elements are supported along the vertical alignment definition Note Some changes may be required to make the Land XML road compatible with Survey Pro If necessary the following changes will be made to the road elements imported into Survey Pro e The horizontal alignment will have extra line segments pre pended or appended to match the length of the vertical alignmen
182. he grid is scaled to the ground Ground Coordinates Origin Select what point to use as the origin of the ground coordinate system relative to the origin of the mapping plane zone The options are Origin at mapping plane origin Ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from the origin of the mapping plane zone Pick point to define origin Ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from a point selected from the job e Key in coordinates to define origin Ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from a location entered by the user Ground Coordinates Key In Origin The Ground Coordinates Key In Origin screen is used to input the location of the ground coordinates origin This screen is used when you select Key in coordinates to define origin on the Setup screen Project Location Enter the local point from which the ground coordinate scale factor is to be applied Coordinate Type Select the type of coordinates to enter You can use WGS84 geodetic local geodetic or grid coordinates This choice will affect the fields displayed below North Latitude Enter the northing latitude of the local origin East Longitude Enter the easting longitude of the local origin Elevation Height Enter the vertical coordinate of the local origin Ground Coordinates Scale The Ground Coordinates Scale screen is used to compute the scale factor to convert grid to ground coordinates for the reference height This screen is u
183. he next station Next Sta advances the current station by the Station Interval Note When advancing if you want to also stake the locations where the alignment of the road changes be sure to check the Stake Corners Not Just Even Intervals option in the Stakeout Settings card Tapping the M button will access the Stakeout Settings lt lt gt gt These buttons are used to select the section of the road that you want to stake Offset When checked is the offset distance that will be applied to the selected design point A positive offset extends from the design point away from the centerline A negative offset extends towards the centerline Subgrade When checked allows you to specify a vertical offset from the actual node locations Positive values result in the stake location occurring below the selected node Negative values result in the stake location occurring above the selected node X Slope is the slope of the selected road section 1 2 Road Width displays the width of the selected road section defined in the previous screen This value can quickly be edited from this field HR is the rod height Backsight opens the Station Setup screen lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen 4 The fourth Offset Staking screen displays the information needed to aim the total station toward the selected design point Station displays the
184. he selected segment and automatically joins the previous segments to the following segments Note When a segment is removed the existing segments toward the centerline will not change Only those on the side of the removed segment away from the centerline are adjusted Edit Segment Roads Edit Templates Edit Insert or Roads Edit Templates Edit Edit or Roads Edit Templates New Insert The Edit Segment screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one Segment Name is the name for the segment A name is required but it does not have to be unique Horizontal Dist is the horizontal length of the offset 206 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Slope V Offset is the slope of the segment or the vertical length respectively When defining a vertical offset select the D if the segment travels downward or select U if the segment travels upward from the point of view of the centerline Note A segment with a negative slope will result in water that flows from the centerline toward the road edge Edit Alignments Roads Edit Alignments or Jobs Edit Alignments The Edit Alignments screen is used to create an alignment that defines the centerline of a road containing both horizontal and vertical elements Editing alignments is fully described here Add Edit Roads Roads Edit Roads The Add Edit Roads screen is used to define your road
185. hen shots are taken Offset Staking Stakeout Offset Staking The Offset Staking screen is used to stake the center of a road the road edge the curb ditch edge or any offset at fixed intervals An existing polyline alignment or a specified point range can define the centerline of the road The first Offset Staking screen is used to define the centerline of the road that you want to offset stake 143 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Tap Line displays a map of all the polylines and alignments in the current job Simply tap the line that you want to offset stake and then tap To From opens a window where a range of points can be defined The points within the specified range will define the centerline of the road to be offset staked Begin Station is the station assigned to the first point of the selected polyline or point range Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Next gt takes you to the second Offset Staking screen Offset Staking Screen 2 The second Offset Staking screen is used to define the cross section of the road that you want to offset stake 1 2 Road Width is the Left and Right width of the road respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment See diagram below X Slope is the Left and Right slope of the road respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment Note A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of payment Stake C
186. her receives Enable will not affect GLONASS numbers if you have turned GLONASS off SV List tab This tab lists signal quality information for each satellite being used which is reported by the receiver The columns available depend on the receiver being used Consult your receiver s documentation for more information Position The Position card displays your current position as well as your course and speed information if you are moving The Position card will display one of three coordinates WGS84 latitude longitude height Local latitude longitude height or Grid north east elevation Solution See the Receiver card Latitude Longitude Height or North East Elevation displays the location of the receiver Heading Displays your course over ground if you are moving If your coordinate display is geodetic this heading is with respect to geodetic north If your coordinate display is grid then this heading is with respect to grid north Speed Displays your horizontal speed over ground if you are moving WGSS84 Set the position display to show WGS 84 latitude longitude and height This option is always available Local LLh Set the position display to show Local latitude longitude and height This option is only available when you have a coordinate system selected and solved Note Local LLh numbers make sense when in mapping plane mode When using Ground Default Ground Calibration mode you should not use Local LL
187. hord length Store RP When checked the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here Solve computes the location of the radius point Layout opens the Curve Layout screen Traverse opens the Traverse on Curve screen Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord 195 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents Line Tangent to Circles Curve Tangent to Circle Will compute the location of a line that is tangent to the specified sides of two specified circles Tangent Line determines which sides of the circles the computed line will be tangent to as you occupy the Ist Radius Point and face the 2nd Radius Point 1st 2nd Radius Pt defines the points around which the circles are computed Radius defines the radius of the circles that are used to compute the Tangent Line
188. hot in the northern hemisphere and Center is selected for star shots Corrections Displays which corrections are currently selected with an N for no or a Y for yes When tapped the Corrections screen opens where the following corrections are configured e Non linear Declination Correction Applies a correction for the linear interpolation of the declination of the sun for the time that an observation is taken This error is usually negligible but is removed when this is checked This should only be checked when performing sun shots e Correct to State Grid When selected the computed azimuth is referenced from the local State Plane grid rather than true north e Center Meridian Zone Constant These values are used to adjust the computed azimuth to the local State Plane grid Appendix A lists these values for the United States GHAO The Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time Greenwich on the current date Decl0 The declination of the sun at zero hour on the current date GHA24 The Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time Greenwich on the following day 24 hours later Decl24 The declination of the sun at zero hour on the following day Solar Semi Diameter The semi diameter of the sun expressed in minutes and seconds Shots Card Number of sets The number of sets that will be taken to the celestial object Reverse Shots When checked reverse shots will be required with each set
189. hout entering any new line data Add Edit Curve Cogo Map Check Add Arc The Add Edit Curve screen is used to enter a new curve to the list prior to the selected line segment Radius The distance from the radius point to the curve Delta The internal angle from center to tangent points Degree Arc The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft arc length Degree Chord The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft chord length Length The arc length Chord The chord length Tangent The distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Azimuth Bearing defines the direction of the curve tangent at the PC Turn defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right while viewing the curve from the PC Point appends the curve to the list 187 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Add to Map Cogo Map Check Add to Map The Add to Map screen is used to add the existing line and curve data to the current job as a polyline Description is the name that will be assigned to the new polyline that will be added to the project Location can be used to manually enter the coordinates for the first point of the polyline Point can be used to define the starting location of the first point of the polyline by an existing point Store Points is the first point name that w
190. ht Point is the other end point of the angle to be solved Select from Map Allows you to quickly select all of the above points from a map view The first point tapped is entered in the Backsight field the second in the Middle Point field and the third point tapped is entered in the End Point field Solve will compute the following results that describe the angle defined by the three points provided Results Angle left is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point face the Backsight and turn counterclockwise to the Foresight Point Angle right is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point face the Backsight and turn clockwise to the Foresight Point 180 right is the angle that results from subtracting the angle right value from 180 HD to Beg is the horizontal distance between the Backsight and the Middle Point HD to End is the horizontal distance between the Foresight Point and the Middle Point Compute Area Cogo Compute Area 184 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Compute Area routine computes the area of a flat horizontal plane encompassed by a selected boundary Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline defining a boundary from a map view To From provides selection of individual points to define a boundary Solve will compute the details for the horizontal area of the selected boundary and display them in the Results screen Results Area is th
191. id heights for the vertical coordinate Geoid Model Select the geoid model from the list of available geoids File Name Shows the geoid file descriptive name File Shows the name of the file on the disk that matches the selected geoid record If there are multiple files that match the selected geoid then you may choose which file to use Set Base Receiver The Set Base Receiver screen is used to enter the base receiver antenna and setup the base receiver hardware Base Receiver Displays information about the status of the GNSS receiver Base Antenna Displays information about the base antenna Antenna Type Select the antenna type to use Setup Tap to change the antenna for the base receiver See Receiver Antenna Measure To Specify the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured Enter the distance from the ground to the Measured To location Post Processing Recording Interval Sets the period for logging GNSS raw data for RTK post processing Set it to Off to disable post processing data collection Next gt Tap to open the Select Base Point screen Receiver Antenna The Receiver Antenna screen is used to select the type of antenna used with the receiver and to enter optional parameters for the antenna setup This screen may be opened for the Base Receiver Antenna Rover Receiver Antenna or the Post Processing Antenna screen Antenna Type Select the antenna type to
192. ified line Results Inv Station is the station on the specified line where the perpendicular offset occurs starting from the Begin Station Offset is the horizontal distance of the perpendicular offset between the Inverse point and specified line Offset is indicates if the Inverse point is located to the Right Left or on the specified line as you occupy Point 1 and face the second point or direction of the line Azimuth pt to line is the azimuth of the offset from the Inverse point toward the specified line North is the Y coordinate on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset East is the X coordinate on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset Elevation is the elevation on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset Inverse Point to Polyline Inverse Point to Polyline The Inverse Point to Polyline screen computes the offset distance from a known point perpendicular to a polyline Inverse Point is the known point that the offset to a polyline segment is computed Begin Station is the starting station assigned to the beginning of the polyline which is used to compute the Station in the results Tap Polyline allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view Editor opens the Polyline Editor where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can be modified Tap Points provides a map view where you can tap any existing points to create a temporary polyline
193. ign point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked 4 The first time Circle Zero is used during a stakeout session a dialog will appear to warn that the original backsight reference will be lost Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the final Station Staking screen used to perform the shots to stakeout the point This is identical to the third Stake Points screen Define a Location Stakeout Define a Location The Define a Location screen is used to manually enter the distance and direction to a new point from any existing reference point and then stakeout the new point From Point is the reference point that the specified angle and distance information is applied to for locating the new point Azimuth Bearing is the direction from the reference point to the new point 165
194. ill be computed at perfect stationing intervals For example if your starting station was 0 15 and your station interval was 100 your next stakeout location will occur at 1 00 instead of 1 15 Use Design Point Description as Descriptor When checked the descriptor for a staked point that is stored will automatically be set to the same descriptor used for the design point When unchecked the descriptor for a stored stake point will automatically be set to the point number of the design point that you are staking Point Tolerance Affects the Remote Staking routine When performing Remote Stakeout the final graphic screen that is displayed when you are near the stake point will occur when you are within the distance to the stake point specified here Line Tolerance Affects the Stake to Line routine When staking to a line and the prism is located at a perpendicular distance to the specified line that is within the range set here a message will state that you are on the line Horizontal Distance Tolerance Affects the GNSS staking routines When you are within the specified distance to the location you are staking you are considered on that location Turn instrument to design point Applies only to motorized total stations The following options are available e 2D HA only A motorized total station will turn horizontally toward the design point after tapping the Turn Instrument button in the particular stakeout screen e 3D HA and ZA A
195. ill be given to all the points that are stored from this screen 223 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Start Location is the location for the first point which is the reference location used to compute the locations of the remaining points The default location is the POB defined from the Edit Alignment screen Edit Description List x From any Description field Edit Description List The Edit Description List screen is used to modify the contents of the drop down description list which is optionally displayed next to any Description field You can also save the list to a file Edit Opens the selected description in a screen where you can modify it Insert Opens a screen where you can add a new description Delete Deletes the selected description Clear Deletes all the descriptions in the list Save Saves the list to the current description text file This is only available when the list only contains the descriptions in the current non code description file Save As Saves the contents of the list to a new description text file Trimble Slant HR gt HR x From any HR field Trimble Slant HR gt HR This option only applies when using a Trimble Traverse Kit that allows the measurement of a Slant HR instead of the usual HR When this option is selected it will convert a Slant HR entered in an HR field to a standard HR This must be performed each time a new Slant HR is entered in the HR field Consult the d
196. ill be used for the new points that are needed to add the figure to the current job All additional points will be incremented from this point adds the figure to the job at the specified location closes the screen without adding any new data to the job Subdivide Area Cogo Subdivide Area The Subdivide Area routine will take a boundary with one open side and compute the location of a line that will enclose the boundary with a specified area using the Hinge Method or the Parallel Method The Hinge Method computes the location of the side of a boundary that can pivot on a fixed point The Parallel Method computes the location of one side of a four sided boundary where the computed side is parallel to a stationary side of the boundary The top left field is used to enter the desired area of the specified boundary In the next field select the units entered from the dropdown list Hinge solves the boundary using the Hinge Method when selected Parallel solves the boundary using the Parallel Method when selected Tap Polyline allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view to define the fixed sides of the boundary Note a boundary has two fixed sides and one side defined by a direction when using the Hinge Method It has one fixed side and two sides defined by a direction when using the Parallel Method Editor opens the Polyline Editor where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can be
197. in the Receiver Settings screen Connect gt Connects to the selected receiver and checks the post processing session status for that receiver If the receiver is not currently logging data the Post Processing Start screen opens If the receiver is currently logging data the End Recording prompt will appear Post Processing Start The Post Processing Start screen is used to select the recording interval and begin logging on the receiver Recording Interval Select the recording interval for post processing data collection Start Static Start a post processing log file in Static mode where the receiver will remain over a single point for the duration of the session Once the file is begun the Static Receiver Session screen opens Start Stop Go Start a post processing log file in Stop and Go mode where the receiver will move between points 132 Survey Pro Help 5 00 and stay stationary on points of interest for periods of time during the survey Once the file is begun the Stop and Go Receiver Session screen opens Note The location of the file is usually on the receiver s built in memory However some models support collection of post processing data to a file on the data collector For those receivers that support it the location of the log file is specified on the Receiver General Settings screen Note The Post Processing screen is used to start a post processing only survey If you wish to record post processing data simultane
198. ines under the Survey menu Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card Prompt for Picture When checked a prompt will appear before storing a point where you have the option of taking one or more pictures associated with the current point Only available when running on a Nomad or a Ranger 3 with a digital camera Survey Map Use Enter Button for Topo When checked the enter key on the active survey map will take a topo shot When unchecked the enter button on the active survey map will take a normal shot Detect Duplicate Shots When checked a prompt will appear before attempting to store a second shot to the same location This helps to catch when robotic total stations have lost lock while surveying The distance tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen are used in determining when two shots are at the same location Survey with True Azimuths Automates the process of adjusting the circle on the total station when traversing so that you can survey with azimuths rather than horizontal angles Skip Check during Station Setup Select this checkbox to skip the check during the station setup procedure Earth Curvature amp Refraction Allows you to select the earth curvature and refraction correction coefficient Select None to tur
199. ing Stakeout Slope Staking The Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain The first screen is used to define or select the line that describes the centerline of the road to be slope staked An existing polyline or alignment can be selected or a series of existing points can be entered to define the centerline Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that defines the centerline of the road To From allows you to enter a range of points to define the centerline of the road Begin Station defines the station at the beginning of the centerline Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Next gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen 2 The second screen is used to describe the profile of the road 1 2 Road Width is the horizontal width of Left and Right sides of the road respectively from the centerline to the nearest edge of the curb or ditch 147 Survey Pro Help 5 00 X Slope is the cross slope of the Left and Right sides of the road respectively The slope is computed from rise run x 100 A negative slope will cause water to run from the centerline toward the edge Stake Curb Ditch When checked this allows you to include a curb or ditch in the road profile Height defines the height of the curb or depth of the ditch A negative value would be used to define the depth of a ditch Offset From Edge of Road defines the width
200. ing The Point Slope Staking routine is a simplified version of the Slope Staking routine The Point Slope Staking routine determines the location of the catch point from a known hinge point and a specified horizontal direction from the hinge point whereas the Slope Staking routine determines the location of the catch point from a perpendicular offset to a known centerline at a specified station The first screen is used to specify the hinge point and horizontal direction from the hinge point to the catch point From Point is the hinge point gt Point gt Direction is either another point that lies in the same vertical plane as the hinge point and catch point or the azimuth from the hinge point to the catch point respectively Fill Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill Cut Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut Height of Rod is the rod height Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Stake CP gt opens the next screen Point Slope Staking Screen 2 The second screen is used to perform the actual point slope staking shots Rod Elev is the current elevation at the rod location 151 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the la
201. ing by tapping on Set HR to open the Receiver Antenna screen Projection Opens the Projection screen View Points Opens the View Coordinates File screen where the project points can be examined Post Process Opens the Receiver Session screen where you can occupy a point for a post processing only session This allows you log a session in the post processing file using an existing point name without changing that point record in the job file Check Opens the Check Control Point screen where the local coordinate computed from the measurement is compared to the local coordinate s known value Control Opens the Occupy Control Point screen where geodetic coordinates are measured at a point with local coordinates and added to that point record in the job file Note A GNSS Control point is made up of a pair of job points which are linked together One of the job points must be a grid point The grid point can be derived from a key in or imported grid coordinate or from a conventional measurement The other job point must be a GNSS point The GNSS point can be derived from a key in or imported geodetic coordinate or from a GNSS measurement Check Control Point Survey Control Points Check Point or 115 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Data Collection Control Check Point The Check Control Point screen is used to check a control point This is done when you want to verify the quality of the coordinate system solution Co
202. int the name specified here and increment to the next available point name for the remaining points Columns is where the column number for each specified coordinate exists in the source TXT file The coordinates types displayed here can either be for plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the selections made in the previous screen If a coordinate has a checkbox which is unchecked it is assumed that the source TXT file does not contain columns for that type of coordinate Survey Pro Help 5 00 Specify Missing Elevation Threshold if the source file was created from coordinates with no elevations but the file contains an elevation column with values such as 0 check this box and indicate the value in the field that will appear to the right Preview opens the ASCH Import Preview window containing all the point data that will be imported This is useful to check for errors before actually importing new data lt Back returns to the previous screen Finish imports the new point data into the current project Import LandXML Coordinates Points alignments polylines and parcels can be imported from a LandXML file The way the LandXML data is imported depends on how the data is stored in the source file and how the settings are configured in the screens described here Consult the User s Manual for more information on the conditions that affect how the data is imported On specified layer will import all th
203. ion Origin N E Enter the local origin north east of the inclined plane Solve gt Updates the calibration solution using the values entered on the Horizontal and or Vertical cards Calibration calculator The Calibration Calculator screen is used to setup a calibration parallel to a selected mapping plane zone or some arbitrary rotation from a single control point Rotation Enter the rotation angle used for the calibration This angle should be the negative of the meridian convergence from your desired grid origin the default ground calibration zone You can use the Calc Rotation function to set the calibration to be parallel to a mapping plane zone Alternatively if you have some other origin for the grid directions such as a sun shot or the central meridian of a township you can enter the convergence between that location and the origin of the default ground calibration zone Calc Rotation Opens the Projection Calculator screen in calculate rotation mode The results are filled into the Rotation field when you complete the calculation Base Station Local Coordinate Enter the local plane coordinates of the base If you set up on a new base point these fields are blank and you need to occupy one control point to calculate the base station local coordinates Occupy Control Opens the Control Points screen where you select a control point to occupy When you are done the base local coordinate is calculated using your entered
204. ion This screen is similar to the Select Base Point screen described in the Start Survey at Base section Base Antenna Displays information about the base antenna received at the rover from the broadcast stream Note If your receiver brand is capable of getting the base antenna information from the data link then the received height will be initialized here Antenna Brand Select the brand of the base receiver antenna Note If we do not know the base antenna brand then this field will display Unknown and the Antenna Type below will be Unknown External with the height given to the base antenna phase center If your base corrections are from a receiver of the same brand or for most NTRIP networks it is acceptable to leave this field as Unknown However if you are doing base to rover RTK and your base is of a different brand than the rover or if your NTRIP network does not use a NULL antenna then it is important to set the base antenna brand to avoid a vertical bias Antenna Type Select the antenna type to use Setup Tap to change the antenna for the base receiver See Receiver Antenna Measure To Specify the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured Enter the distance from the ground to the Measured To location Finish Tap to open the Data Collection screen You can finish on this screen if the coordinate system and any required calibration are already solved
205. ion is the station assigned to the PC Point Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Next gt takes you to the second Stake Curve and Offset screen described below MI opens the Stakeout Settings screen Curve and Offset Screen 2 Station to Stake is the desired station on the curve that you want to stake Station Interval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Sta button is pressed Next Sta advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset from the specified curve The offset occurs on the left while viewing the curve from the PC when the L is selected or on the right when the R is selected Note An offset of zero would result in the specified curve being staked V Offset will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut fill values accordingly Design elevations will be lower when D is selected and higher when U is selected Grade specifies a slope from the specified curve to the curve that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the specified curve as the Offset value increases Height of Rod is the length of the rod lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the third Stake Curve and Offset screen 155 Survey
206. ion for the current station Spiral Curve Spiral The Spiral screen will compute the details of a spiral curve given the spiral length and radius Spiral length is the length of the spiral curve Radius is the circular curve radius Solve computes the details of the spiral curve Layout opens the Spiral Layout screen where the location of stations on the spiral curve can be computed Traverse opens the Traverse on Spiral screen Results X of Throw is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point Y of Throw is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve X is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent Y is distance from the SC to the tangent Delta is the angle between the tangent and the line between the PI and SC Spiral Layout Curve Spiral The Spiral Layout screen is used to compute station locations on a spiral curve Radius is the radius of the circular curve Spiral Length is the length along the spiral curve from TS to SC TS station is the station at the TS point Interval When checked is the spiral arc distance that is added or subtracted from the Current Station using the Sta and Sta buttons Current Station is the station on the curve that is computed Solve solves and displays the details for the specified spiral curve Sta decreases the Current Station by the specified Interval
207. ircle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this 214 Survey Pro Help 5 00 button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the final Stake Road screen where the shots to the stake point are performed Stake Road Screen 4 The fourth and final Stake Road screen is used to perform the shots necessary to locate the design point This screen is identical to the final Stake Points screen Road Slope Staking Roads Slope Staking The Road Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch point of the road at any station Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road Begin Station displays the st
208. is screen it will be replaced by the polyline being created To From Allows you to define a range of points that define a polyline If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen it will be replaced by the polyline being created Edit Opens the Polyline Editor where the polyline can be further edited Clear Permanently removes the selected polyline from the job Properties Opens the New Line screen where the description layer and feature attributes can be modified 123 Desi Opens the Map Display Options screen to select what is displayed on the screen Points on DTM Layer Job View DTM Points 58 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Points on DTM Layer screen displays all the points on the DTM layer and allows you to add points from another layer or delete move points to a different layer Delete Move the selected point s to the Auxiliary layer If the Auxiliary layer is not specified you will be prompted to select the layer to move the points to Note Points on a boundary or break line cannot be deleted GoTo Quickly find and select the specified point Add From To Opens the Select Point s screen where a point range can be entered The points will then be moved to the DTM layer Del From To Opens the Select Point s screen where a point range can be entered The points will then be moved to the Auxiliary layer 3D View Job View DTM 3D View The 3
209. is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External not shown The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents Known PI and Tangents Curve PI and Tangents The PI and Tangents screen is used to compute and store the PC PT a nd radius points when the PI point and the direction of both tangents are known along with one other curve attribute PI Point is the PI point Azm PI gt PC Brg PI gt PC is the direction of the tangent from the PI to the PC Azm PI gt PT Brg PI gt PT is the direction of the tangent from the PI to the PT The remaining curve attribute can be defined with one of the following selections e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Store PC When checked will store the computed PC point with the specified point name Store RP When checked will store the computed radius point with the specified point name Store PT When checked will store the c
210. its Temperature Enter the temperature and temperature units PPM Enter the parts per million correction factor for measured slope distances 68 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Station Setup Known Point The following screens are used when the setup type is set to Known Point Station Setup Known Point Enter Occupy Point Occupy Point Select a point to setup on You can enter a point name select from a list or from the map If you enter a new point name here you will have to enter known coordinates for that point and store it before proceeding with the wizard 2D Survey Check this box to conduct a 2D survey This option will allow you to select a 2D point for the occupy point and will disable the height of instrument and rod controls in setup and measurement taking user interface Information Shows the location N E Elev and description of the selected occupy point HI Enter the height of instrument if you are doing a 3D survey Remote Elevation This button is available when using 3D survey Mode Tap this button to open the_Remote Elevation screen where you can calculate the height of the instrument from a shot on the rod on a different point Check Setup This button is only available when there is already a station setup in place Tap Check Setup to open the Station Check screen Next gt Advances to the Orient Instrument page Station Setup Known Point Orient Instrument New Point BS Point BS Azimuth
211. job name using the current new job settings Settings gt opens the Units and Format Screen where you can modify the default settings for creating a new job Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the Main Menu Create a New Job Units and Format Screen Azimuth Type specifies if you are surveying with a North Azimuth or South Azimuth Grid Direction specifies if your grid coordinates are increasing positive in the North East or the South West direction Units for Distances specifies if your distances will be entered in International Feet US Survey Feet or Meters Note You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job by appending the distance value with the following characters e f or ft or ift International Feet e usf or usft US Survey Feet e ior in Inches e m Meters e cm Centimeters e mm Millimeters e cor ch Chains Once the cursor leaves that field the distance will be converted automatically A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional Units for Angles specifies if angles will be entered in Degrees or Grads Earth Curvature amp Refraction Allows you to select the earth curvature and refraction correction coefficient Select None to turn Earth Curvature amp Refraction correction off Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note To use a scale factor with a job go to the Scale Settings card to configure the scale factor
212. ld and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points storing them with the next available point name Starting At is the point name assigned to the imported point when using the Rename or Rename All functions Compare Coordinates will open a screen showing the coordinates for the duplicate points to assist in making a decision of how to handle the new point Stop Importing will not import the current duplicate point and will stop importing any remaining points All previous points will still be imported into the current job Export File Export The Export screen allows you to export selected points from the current job to a new job or to a coordinate file in another format This first screen is used to specify the type of file that you want to export data to Note If you are exporting to a LandXML file or to a Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW file pair you do not select points for export as the entire contents of the current job are exported Survey survey File when selected the chosen points and lines are exported to a Survey Pro version 5 format file Job JOB File when selected the chosen points and lines are exported to a Survey Pro version 4 format file Survey Pro Help 5 00 Survey Pro 4 x JOB RAW File when selected the entire job is exported to a Survey Pro version 4 format JOB RAW file pair Coordinate CR5 File when selected the chosen points are exported to a CR5 coordinate fil
213. line or point range Change Design Point opens the Edit Point List screen where the current point list can be edited Increment is the number of points to advance from the Design Point after tapping Next Point gt A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt Advances the Design Point by the Increment and automatically solves to open the Stake List of Points screen where you can begin staking the point The points are advanced in the same order that they were defined when the polyline was created or when the point range was defined Height of Rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Solve gt opens the next Stake List of Points screen where the current Design Point can be staked Note The screens available after tapping Solve gt or Next Point gt are identical to Screens Two and Three in the Stake Points routine ia opens the Stakeout Settings screen Edit Point List Stakeout Stake List of Points Change Design Point or 141 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Stakeout Stake List of Points v Edit List The Edit Point List screen is used to modify the existing point list Remove removes the selected point from the point list Clear All removes all the points from the point list To Closest is available only when the screen is accessed with the Change Design Point button This will automatically sele
214. lines and alignments in the current job Simply tap the line that you want to stake to and then tap To From opens a window where a line can be defined by a range of points Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Stake gt takes you to the second Stake to Line screen Stake to Line Screen 2 The second screen is where the staking is performed The graphic display of this screen will change depending on how close the rod is to the specified line The initial screen that is displayed before a shot is performed shows the position of the total station the line of the backsight and the specified line to stake Each type of graphic is displayed below 142 Survey Pro Help 5 00 HR is the rod length EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports BACK FORWARD is the distance that the rod must travel BACK away from the total station or FORWARD toward the total station in order to occupy the specified line LEFT of Line RIGHT of Line ON LINE is displayed if the rod is to the left or right side of the line or is on the line The LEFT and RIGHT side is determined as if occupying the Start Point and facing the Foresight Point or Direction of the line specified in Screen 1 ON LINE is determined if you are within the Line Tolerance specifie
215. llows you to edit the selected super elevation in the Edit Super Elevation screen which is identical to the Add Super Elevation screen Remove removes the selected super elevation from the list Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen Add Edit Super Elevation Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Super Elevations Add or Edit The Add Edit Super Elevation screen allows you to add a super elevation to the road or edit an existing super elevation Start Station is the location of the beginning of the super elevation on the alignment Length End Station is the length of the super elevation measured from the Start Station or it is the end station depending on how the button is toggled Note Keep in mind that the slope at the end of a super elevation will continue down the road unless another super 212 Survey Pro Help 5 00 elevation is entered to change the slope back again For example a curve will typically require two super elevations for each side of the road one at the beginning of the curve and one at the end Slope 1 2 is the starting and ending slopes of the road respectively The starting slope must match the current slope of the road at that station Parabolic Transition 1 2 is the length of the vertical curve that will lead in and out of the super elevation respectively Parabolic transitions are optional parts of a supe
216. location When this screen is first opened Survey Pro searches the job file database for a location matching the base receiver s current position This screen will then open in one of three states e No matching base point e One matching base point e Multiple matching points No Matching Base Point This screen appears when the base receiver s location matches a single point in the job file Base is set on a new job point Select this if the base is set up on a point that is not already stored in the job Base is set on an existing job point Select this when the base is set up on a point stored in the job Base Point Specifies the name of the base point This is a new point name when the base is set on a new point or an existing point name when the base is set on an existing job point One Matching Base Point This screen appears when the base receiver s location matches a single point that matches the base receiver position Base Point Shows the name of the point matching the base receiver s location Change gt Changes this screen to the No Matching Base Point display described above where you can override the point selected to match the base receiver s location More Than One Matching Base Point This screen appears when the base receiver s location may match more than one point in the job file Select a Base Point Allows you to select a point from the dropdown list that contains all the matching points found in the job
217. m an alignment the number of points stored will equal the number of nodes that occur in the horizontal portion of the alignment Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the offset will be computed from To From allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the offset will be computed from Offset defines the offset distance and which side the offset occurs The right or left side is referenced from the first point that defines the specified line Save to job as an alignment when checked the computed offset line will be saved as a new alignment under the name specified in the Description field Note Spiral curves cannot be generated in a new offset alignment If the original centerline contains any spiral curves 182 Survey Pro Help 5 00 they will be treated as straight sections in the offset alignment that is created The Offset Staking or Offset Points routine should be used to stake offsets from a spiral curve Store Pts When checked is the first point name that will be used when storing the computed offset points Additional points will automatically be assigned with the next consecutive point name such as 8 9 10 or Offset Offset2 Offset3 Description is the description that will be assigned to the new points that are generated or to the new alignment Solve computes and stores the new offset points and polyline Offset Points Cogo Offset Points The
218. milar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Reference Manual for details Stake DTM Stakeout Stake DTM The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut fill and volume information based on a reference DTM or specified elevation datum The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional reference manual for details DTM GNSS Shot Stakeout Stake DTM Solve 175 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The DTM GPS Shot screen displays all relevant information on the current rover position and a graphic that shows the rover location the occupied TIN triangle and the rectangular DTM corners of the DTM boundary Note the DTM boundary corners and TIN triangle may not be visible depending on the current scale of the screen gt OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Note You m
219. mode If you select a mapping plane coordinate system your scale settings will automatically be configured Next gt opens the Select Control File Screen where you can select a control file to load into the new job x Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the Main Menu Create a New Job Select Control File Screen Use a Control File check to import control points into the new job Browse allows you to select a JOB or a SURVEY file to import control points from lt Back returns you to the Units and Format Screen Next gt opens the Select Coordinate System Screen where you can specify the coordinate system to use for the new job Create a New Job Select Coordinate System Screen Select Coordinate System check to select a coordinate system from the database Leave this box unchecked if you are doing a survey in a flat earth plane coordinate system Note If you are doing a GNSS survey and there is no projection and no datum to relate your local coordinates to latitude longitude and height then leave this box unchecked and the GNSS survey will start in Default Ground Calibration mode If Select Coordinate System is checked select the coordinate system from the data base using the following controls Region select the coordinate system region Zone select the coordinate system zone Datum displays the datum for the selected zone or allows you to select a datum for
220. model and the models that are not yet available The set up procedure for your particular total station is better handled by the total station manufacturer or your instrument s dealer If you have specific questions on the set up of your total station you should refer to the documentation that was included with your total station GNSS Receiver Settings Job Settings GNSS Receivers Add or delete receiver profiles and change receiver profile settings Profiles are associated with a specific receiver and use the receiver serial number as a unique identifier From left to right the receiver profile shows Profile name Name of the receiver Communications Settings icon Tap to access Receiver Communications settings The following icons may appear The receiver is set for Bluetooth communications The receiver is set for serial communications Data Modem Settings icon Tap to access Data Modem Settings The following icons may appear Internet data modem 2 Data modem that supports both base and rover operations Data modem that supports only rover operations I Data modem that supports only base operations P Unknown data modem General Receiver Settings icon D Tap to access Receiver Settings Add Receiver icon Tap to open the Add Receiver wizard Tap and hold the receiver profile to show the context sensitive menu 24 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Receiver Info Select to launch the Receiver Info
221. modified Tap Points provides a map view where you can tap any existing points to define the fixed sides of the boundary To From provides point selection by entering point names Store Pt 1 2 When checked will store a point at the location of the end point s of the computed boundary line 188 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Azimuth Bearing defines the direction of the boundary sides with lengths that are not yet known Results Point 1 2 Displays the coordinate of the end points of the computed boundary line Total Area is the total area of the boundary Plot Area is the area enclosed by the pre defined fixed boundary lines Difference is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area HD VD to SD ZA Cogo HD VD to SD ZA The HD VD to SD ZA screen will convert a vertical and horizontal distance to an equivalent slope distance and zenith angle Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the foresight point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the foresight point HI is the distance that the total station is above the ground HR is the length of the rod Earth Curvature and Refraction Set the earth curvature and refraction correction coefficient Select None to turn earth curvature and refraction correction off for all observations from this station setup Solve computes the equivalent slope distance and zenith angle from the data entered Results
222. motorized total station will turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point after tapping the Turn Instrument button in the particular stakeout screen e Automatic 2D HA only A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens e Automatic 3D HA and ZA A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens Cut Sheet Offset stored The cut sheet offset information can be stored to the raw data file in either of the following formats when performing any offset staking routine e Design Offset When selected a cut sheet report will list the design offset values e Actual Offset When selected a cut sheet report will list the measured offset values Display Directions As Guides you to the GNSS stakeout location using one of the following formats e Northing Easting Suggests you Go South Go North and Go West Go East e Distance Azimuth Displays the necessary Azimuth and Distance to the stakeout location Forward Back Suggests you go FORWD BACK and Go Left Go Right when you are within 3 meters to the location When you are farther than 3 meters a distance and azimuth is used Repetition Settings The Repetition Settings card contains the settings that control how repetition shots are performed and acceptable tolerances Horizontal Tolerance A warning message will be displaye
223. mpted to select the layer where you want to put the imported points 12 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Layer will import all the data on the specified layer If no coordinate system is configured for the current job a dialog asks if you want to set the coordinate system for the current job to the coordinate system used in the JXL source file Confirm Point Replace If a point being imported has the same name and the same coordinates as a point that is already in the current job it is ignored and a message will be displayed after the remaining points are imported indicating this If an imported point is encountered with the same name but with different coordinates as a point in the current project the Confirm Point Replace screen will open Yes will replace the point in the current job with the point being imported Yes to All will replace the point in the current job with the point being imported and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points No will not import the duplicate point keeping the coordinates for the existing point unchanged No to All will not import the duplicate point keeping the coordinates for the existing point unchanged and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points Rename will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At field Rename All will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At fie
224. n GNSS Status Index Start Survey Index Base Info End Survey Projection Index Import GNSS Control Receiver Information Projection Calculator Index File Management Survey Menu RTK GNSS Mode Base and Rover Set Up but required calibration not yet solved GNSS Status Index Solve Calibration Index Base Info End Survey Projection Index 97 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Import GNSS Control Receiver Information Projection Calculator Index File Management Survey Menu RTK GNSS Mode Survey in Session GNSS Status Index Traverse Base Data Collection Index Resume Survey End Survey Control Points Index Quick Codes Base Info Projection Index Remote Elevation Import GNSS Control Receiver Information Projection Calculator Index File Management Main Index Survey Menu Post Processing Mode GNSS Status Index Start Static Occupy Static Start Stop Go Occu Stop Go End Recording Receiver Information File Management Main Index Start Survey at Base Index Start Survey at Base Connect to Base Projection Prompt Set Base Receiver 98 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Receiver Antenna Select Base Point Connect to Rover Set Rover Receiver GNSS Resection Backsight Occupy Control Set Up Occupy Control Point Check GNSS Resection Backsight Occupy Check Setup Occupy Check Point Solve Calibration Results Start Survey Index Start Survey at Rover Connect to Rover Projection Prompt Set Rover Receiv
225. n Earth Curvature amp Refraction correction off Scale Factor Settings The Scale Factor card shows you the current scale factor mode for scaling ground to grid distances Setup Scale opens up the Scale Settings screen where you can select the desired method to use for scaling ground to grid distances Note Scaling of ground to grid distances is usually only required when your coordinate system is set to some kind of conformal mapping plane For a simple plane survey using a flat earth model where ground measured distances are 1 1 to coordinate grid distances you should leave your scale factor turned off Scale Settings Job Settings Scale Factor Setup Scale The Scale Settings screen is the starting point for setting up a mapping grid scale factor Once configured you will return to the Surveying Settings screen where you must then tap to save the scale settings Do not use a scale factor Disable any mapping plane scaling that is currently enabled Use a single combined scale factor Uses a single combined scale factor that is provided for you or one can be computed with the Calculate Scale wizard Use a grid factor with sea level correction Uses a mapping plane scale factor that is adjusted for elevation changes Use automatic map plane grid factor with sea level correction Uses a combined scale factor that is adjusted for 36 Survey Pro Help 5 00 elevation changes Use map plane ground coordinates When
226. n order to configure the radio Settings for Spectra Precision Receivers If the current profile is for Promark 500 800 receiver the general page also shows the following settings Storage Location Select Internal Memory to store post processing data to the receiver s internal memory Select USB Memory to store post processing data a USB storage device connected to the receiver NMEA Outputs Select On to enable NMEA outputs on the receiver COM port at 9600 baud 8 data bits and no parity Select Off to disable NMEA outputs If the current profile is for Promark 200 receiver the general page also shows the following settings Storage Location Select Internal Memory to store post processing data to the Promark device s internal memory Select SD Card to store post processing data a SD card in the Promark device NMEA Outputs Select On to enable NMEA outputs on the Promark device s COM port Select Off to disable NMEA outputs If the current profile is for an Epoch 50 receiver the general page also shows the following settings NMEA Outputs Select On to enable NMEA outputs on receiver COM port 2 at 9600 baud 8 data bits and no parity Select Off to disable NMEA outputs Note NMEA outputs are only possible when your RTK mode is NTRIP with windows networking Settings for Spectra Precision Receivers If the current profile is for an Epoch 35 receiver the general page also shows the following settings SBAS Tracking Select On to e
227. n part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Delta is the deflection angle e Length is the arc length e Chord is the chord length e Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI e Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length e External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve PC Station is the starting station assigned to the PC Interval When checked all necessary information for each station at the specified interval on the curve will be computed Start station when not computing by interval above only the information for the particular station entered here is computed Solve will solve and display all the details of the specified curve without the layout information Sta decreases the current station by the station interval Sta increases the current station by the station interval Layout will solve and display the layout information for all the stations of the specified curve 197 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve
228. n the current job Selecting any of the polylines listed will display a horizontal overhead and vertical side view of that polyline Edit Open the selected polyline in the New Polyline screen described below 46 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Delete Delete the selected polyline New Open the Polyline Editor where a new polyline can be created Import PL5 Import polylines Available on the Power menu button item Tap the down arrow to open this menu from the Edit Polylines screen Export PLS Export polylines Available on the Power menu button item Tap the down arrow to open this menu from the Edit Polylines screen New Polyline The second screen is used to define all of the points that are used in the polyline Any curve information will be entered later but the end points must still be selected at this point The current polyline is shown on color displays with bold red lines and all other polylines are shown using thin black lines Only the current polyline data can be edited Tap Points Opens a map view where the points in your polyline can be tapped They must be tapped in the order that they occur in the polyline To From Allows you to define a range of points to define a polyline Edit Opens the third screen described next where the current polyline can be modified Clear Removes the current polyline Properties Allows you to enter a Description and select a Layer for the Polyline I
229. n the index card style tabs at the bottom of the screen to access different Settings screens If the desired tab is not in view tap the small arrow buttons to scroll through the available tabs The Instrument Settings screen is the first of multiple screens used to identify and configure the instrument s you are using with the software The correct settings must be configured for successful communications between the data collector and the instrument The upper portion of the first Instrument Settings screen lists the names of all the instrument profiles on the data collector The other columns list the COM Port Brand and Model of the instrument defined in each profile Manual Mode A special profile that cannot be deleted When activated all surveying is performed without being connected to an instrument and all shot data must be entered manually 22 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note When running in leveling mode the Instrument Settings can be selected for Manual Mode to open the Level Method screen Instrument Settings Opens the next Instrument Settings screen where the settings in the selected instrument profile can be modified Note When editing an existing instrument profile you cannot modify the instrument brand or model Create New Instrument Opens the next Instrument Settings screen where you can configure the settings for a new instrument and create a new instrument profile Activate Activates the selected instrument
230. n where various automatic and manual data collection options are available Offset Opens the Offset Shots screen where a point can be collected and stored at a specified offset Point Opens the Occupy Data Points screen used to occupy and store a new point Traverse Base The Traverse Base routine provides an easy method to collect a point and then move your base to that point or to move your base to any existing point in the current job Traverse Base gt Prompts you to move your base to another existing job point and then starts the Start Survey at Base wizard Occupy then Traverse gt Opens the Occupy Data Points screen and allows you to first occupy and store a new point You will then be prompted to connect to your base and the Start Survey at Base workflow will open Feature Collection Survey Data Collection Feature The Feature Collection screen is used when you wish to set up automated continuous data collection Points to be Stored Displays the starting point name and description of the group of points to be stored Method Select the method of continuous data collection The available methods are described below Time Interval After accepting the first point additional points will automatically be stored after the specified time interval in seconds has elapsed Each successive point name is incremented to the next available name e Distance Interval 2D 3D After accepting the first point additional point
231. nable tracking SBAS satellites Select Off to disable tracking SBAS satellites Confidence Level Select High to have the receiver ambiguity resolution use a high confidence level This is the desired setting for the most robust ambiguity resolution but will result in the inability to get a fixed RTK position in challenging GNSS environments Select Low to have the receiver ambiguity resolution use a low confidence level This setting should only be used in challenging GNSS environments and you should be aware of the possibility that the RTK solution may fix on incorrect ambiguities Settings For Trimble Receivers If the current profile is for a Trimble receiver the general page also shows the following settings Log post process data to Select handheld or receiver memory 30 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Glonass tracking Select On or Off Settings for Thales Ashtech Receivers If the current profile is for a Thales Ashtech receiver the general page also shows the following settings Canopy is where you set a parameter to describe the multi path environment This command is relevant for ROVER mode or RVP Choices are Open Sky default Under Canopy forest urban canyon Confidence Level is where you set the confidence level for ambiguity fixing The values here are the statistical confidence level in percent The higher the confidence level the more certainty that the ambiguities are fixed correctly But the longer it will take to
232. nates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page the values on this page are calculated from the parameters entered in the wizard If the origin was set at the Mapping plane origin then you need to enter the scale and offsets in the edit fields on this page Ground Offsets Displays the shift applied to the mapping plane coordinates to get the desired local ground coordinate at the selected origin Scale Displays the ground scale factor Remote Elevation Survey Remote Elevation The Remote Elevation screen is used to compute and store a new base point elevation and vertical site by occupying a known vertical benchmark at the rover Note The Remote Elevation screen is only available when a geoid model is used for the vertical projection the horizontal projection is already solved and the base and rover are set Base Point Displays the current base point number and elevation details Info Opens detailed information about the base point Add Benchmark Elevation When selected a new point will be created in the job file with the entered elevation We will calculate N E from the GNSS measurement lat Ing and store the new point with the entered Elevation Elevation When Add Benchmark Elevation is selected this is the elevation of the new point Select Point New Point Existing or new benchmark point name that you will occupy Set HR Displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting Yo
233. nce point to the new point Store point When this is checked the computed point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the location for and optionally store the new point Intersection Cogo Intersection The Intersection screen computes and optionally stores the coordinates for the intersection of two lines where the lines are tangent to existing points Each line is independently defined by a known direction or a known length Point 1 is an existing point that is tangent to the first line Point 2 is an existing point that is tangent to the second line Distance Azm or Brg is the length or direction of the specific line tangent to the specified point Store I Sect 1 2 These items are only available after solving the screen Once solved the computed intersections can be viewed from the Map card where you can decide which intersecting point s to store in the Input card Store Stores the intersecting points checked above which were computed after solving Solve will compute the intersecting point s and open the Results card Offset Line Cogo Offset Line The Offset Line screen is used to store points or an alignment that is parallel to an existing set of points a polyline or an alignment at a specified perpendicular offset Note When storing points the number of new points stored will equal the number of points in the selected polyline or point range If the offset is fro
234. nd Circle Zero buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Reference Manual for details Curve and Offset Stakeout Curve and Offset The instructions for the Curve and Offset routine for GNSS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and Circle Zero buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Reference Manual for details Spiral and Offset Stakeout Spiral and Offset The instructions for the Spiral and Offset routine for GNSS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and Circle Zero buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Reference Manual for details Show Station and Offset Stakeout Show Station The Show Station and Offset routine allows you to position the rover anywhere near a polyline a range of points that define a line or an alignment to see where the rod is located in relation to the selected line The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna a
235. nd the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional Reference Manual for details 174 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Show Station Screen 2 Once the line is selected the second screen is opened where information is displayed about the rod position and the selected line GNSS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver Tap on this button to open the detailed GNSS Status screen gt OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point gt Results gt N E Z displays either the results or plane coordinates in the lower corner of the screen Station is the station at the current rod position Offset Dist is the perpendicular distance from the line to the rod Elev is the elevation at the rod position Offset displays if the rod is on the Left or Right of the line Segment displays the type of line segment at the current station lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores a point for the current rod location Store Offset Points Stakeout Store Offset Points The instructions for the Store Offset Points routine for GNSS are si
236. not the value the receiver is currently using Sat Info The Sat Info card displays signal quality information for the satellites used by the receiver and allows you to disable tracking specific satellites which is useful if the receiver is tracking a noisy satellite 103 Survey Pro Help 5 00 SNR Plot tab This tab lists all the satellites that are in view and shows a bar graph that indicates the signal to noise ratio A longer bar indicates more noise and a lower quality signal USI The universal identifier number of the satellite that you wish to disable or re enable For GPS satellites this will be the Pseudo Random Noise PRN number and will be between 1 and 37 For GLONASS satellites this will be the Frequency Channel Number FCN 45 and will be between 45 and 70 Disable Disables the USI entered above This satellite will then no longer be used in any solution until it is re enabled Enable Re enables the USI entered above Enable All Enables all the satellites that were disabled The following buttons appear only if the connected instrument supports GLONASS GLO On Enables all GLONASS satellites GLO Off Disables all GLONASS satellites Note Depending on the receiver brand and model the behavior of GLO On GLO Off and Disable Enable varies For example with some receivers you can enable a single GLONASS satellite using Enable after you have previously turned all GLONASS off while with ot
237. ns the Add Widening screen which allows you to add a widening to the same side of the road that was selected Edit allows you to edit the selected widening in the Edit Widening screen which is identical to the Add Widening screen Remove removes the selected widening from the list Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen Add Edit Widening Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Widenings Add or Edit The Add Edit Widening screen allows you to add a widening to the road or edit an existing widening Start Station is the location of the beginning of the widening on the alignment Length End Station is the length of the widening measured from the Start Station or it is the end station depending on how the button is toggled Starting Width is the starting width of the widening This must match the width of the previous template or widening Ending Width is the ending width of the widening 211 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Check opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors New opens the New Widening screen which is identical to the Edit Widening screen where a new widening can be created Edit opens the Edit Widening Screen screen where the selected widening can be modified Mirror to Right Left duplicates the widening to the other side of the road when checked Super Elevations Card Roads Edit Roads
238. nt Results screen will open If there are multiple points selected the Multiple Points Results screen will be open Single Point Results This page displays the values to be used to create the new GNSS control point New GNSS Control Point to be Created This shows the new NEE location for the selected point the existing LLH location the existing NEE location and the deltas between the new and old locations This will also include data sheet details if the control point source comes from an NGS data sheet or an OPUS Solution Report file Tap Finish to Determines what will occur after tapping Finish from the following options e Automatically solve calibration calibration e Open the solve calibration calibration wizard e Solve the calibration calibration later lt Back Opens a prompt asking if you want to reenter the control source for the selected point If Yes the control point source is cleared for the point and the previous screen is open If No we leave the control point source and go back to the selection screen Finish See the section on Finish below Multiple Point Results This screen displays the values to be used to create the new GNSS control points New GNSS Control Points to be Created For all of the selected points this list box shows the new NEE location the existing LLH location and the existing NEE location 129 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Show Details Shows the same details for the selected p
239. nt from in a situation that requires a fill Changes to these fields will be reflected in the V Map card graphic Stake CP gt opens the next slope staking screen The following slope staking screens are identical to non road layout slope staking screens and are described starting here Road Station and Offset Roads Show Station The Road Station and Offset routine allows you to take a shot to a prism that is positioned anywhere on the road and compute the details of where that point is located in relation to the road This information can then be compared to the 216 Survey Pro Help 5 00 data from a grade sheet Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road Begin Station displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road End Station displays the final station in the road Use Station Equation When checked the current station equation will be applied to the road Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen where a station equation can be configured Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen Next gt takes you to the next Road Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Road Station and Offset Screen 2 The second Road Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data from various cards Height of Rod is the length of the rod ED
240. ntical to the image shown on except the hidden lines are not removed Display the Difference This applies only to DTM stakeout When checked the vertical portion z axis of the 3D View screen is computed by the elevation differences between the non reference DTM surface and the reference DTM surface This will result in any objects that occur above or below the reference DTM to clearly stand out as hills and valleys and the volume information provided in the 3D View screen will be between the staked points and the reference DTM When unchecked the Datum field can be set to a reference elevation Cut and fill volumes in the 3D View screen will then be based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the non reference DTM surface Datum When the Display the Difference checkbox is unchecked cut and fill volumes will be computed in the 3D View screen based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the staked points View Direction from view point to the center Allows you to specify the exact horizontal and vertical angle in which to view the DTM Manage Layers Job Manage Layers The Manage Layers screen is used to manage the layers for the current job All existing layers are displayed along with which layers are visible and how many objects are on each layer Set Active Set the selected layer as the active layer The active layer is marked with a symbol N
241. ntional mechanical total stations e Quick Stake States e Operating Quick Stake e Stakeout settings Note For a description of common controls see Quick Shot Quick Stake States Blank When no valid design point has been entered when it first started ANGLE TO TURN TO DISTANCE Once a valid point has been entered and an angle reading is received from the instrument Angle to Turn To appears with an arrow icon and the angle itself is in the current angle unit When the instrument is turned to the left by hand the instrument operator sees the angle count down to 0 and past 0 and the angle increases while the left arrow icon changes to a right arrow icon Note If the instrument has servo motors tap the turn icon so that the instrument can turn to 0 by itself COME GO LEFT RIGHT CUT FILL Tap the MSR button to shoot the target If a slope distance is available it 93 Survey Pro Help 5 00 goes into the third state and shows stakeout information of Come Go Left Right and Cut Fill The icons on the screen are used as follow Survey There are two options e Survey Return to Quick Shot quickly e Check Station Launches the Check Setup dialog Turn to Appears if the instrument supports motorized turning There are two options Turn To Line Turn the instrument to turn point 2D Turn to Starts the Turn To dialog Search Appears if the instrument supports AutoLock There are three options Search Find a pri
242. o Help 5 00 station associated with the Start Point Screen 2 is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen 3 provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point Screen 4 is used to stake the current station Show Station and Offset Stakeout Show Station The Show Station and Offset routine allows you to take a shot to a prism that is positioned anywhere near a polyline a range of points that define a line or an alignment to see where the prism is located in relation to the line Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the station and offset will be computed from To From allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the station and offset will be computed from Begin Station is the station assigned to the beginning of the line Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Next gt takes you to the next Show Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Show Station and Offset Screen 2 The second Show Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data Height of Rod is the length of the rod EDM This button can be toggled to various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that i
243. o import them without any conversion being performed To do this be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job Store Point is the starting point number if points are stored during the staking process Future points are stored with the next available point names HR is the rod height Z x opens the Smart Target options With Centerline When checked offset and stationing information from the selected centerline to the stake point is also provided in the DTM Shot screen Choose a Centerline will open the Select Line screen where an existing polyline or alignment can be selected that describes a centerline Generate DTM with Staked Points will add any staked points to the non reference DTM layer and generate a DTM surface for all the objects on this layer This DTM surface will be updated when a new point is stored to it You can also view this surface with live cut fill volumes at any time from the 3D View screen Note Viewing the DTM during DTM Stakeout is a useful quality assurance technique to determine where additional points are needed Setup View DTM opens the Setup DTM 3D screen where the non reference DTM layers are configured and optionally viewed from the 3D View screen Backsight opens the Station Setup screen Next gt opens the next screen Choose a Centerline Stakeout Stake DTM Choose a Centerline The Select Line screen is us
244. o the RTK rover is confirmed you will be prompted if you want to Reset Rover Opens the Start Survey at Rover workflow where you can restart the rover receiver Data Collection Opens the Data Collection screen where you can continue to collect data End GNSS Survey Survey End GNSS Survey The End GNSS Survey screen is used to stop an active post processing Stop amp Go recording session or stop an RTK survey by hanging up an NTRIP connection if applicable and invalidating the rover setup The initial screen lists all the activities that will occur if you choose to continue which varies depending on the type of survey being ended If you choose to end a post processing session the session is closed and if using a receiver that supports file downloads a prompt will also occur asking if you want to download the file If you choose to download the file the File Management screen will open where you can download and manage existing files Quick Codes Survey Quick Codes The Quick Codes screen is used to rapidly take shots with different description codes GNSS Status at top of screen Displays the current solution type the data modem reception quality the number of satellites used and the horizontal precision computed by the receiver Tap this area to open the GNSS Status screen Point Enter the point name for the next point to be stored Note If you specify an existing point in the Point field you are prompted to ove
245. ocumentation that came with the Trimble Traverse Kit for more information on correctly measuring a Slant HR Convert Slant HI gt HI hd From any HI field Convert Slant HI to HI This option is only available when using a Trimble total station that supports a Slant HI instead of the usual HI such as a Trimble S6 When this option is selected it will convert a Slant HI entered in an HI field to a standard HI This must be performed each time a new Slant HI is entered in an HI field Consult the documentation that came with the Trimble Total Station from more information on correctly measuring a Slant HI 224 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Quick Pick Editor uf Edit Quick Pick located at bottom of list The Quick Pick Editor is used to customize the list of routines available from the uw Quick Pick button Menu Items Is a dropdown list containing the menu items you would normally see in the Main Menu Selecting a menu item from this list will display all of the routines from that menu item that can be included in the Quick Pick list Routines listed in bold are already in the Quick Pick list Add gt will add the routine selected in the left column to the bottom of the Quick Pick list which can then be moved elsewhere in the list Defaults will revert the Quick Pick list back to the defaults A prompt will first ask you if you are sure before the changes occur Quick Picks is the list of routines available from the current Q
246. oint as the Single Point Results screen shows described above Re Enter Clears the control point source for the selected point in the list box and returns to the previous screen lt Back Returns to the selection screen Finish See Finish below Finish The finish behavior will be one of three cases 1 Create the control points solve the calibration with all job file control points launch the projection readjust wizard and apply the updated calibration to the map projection zone 2 Create the control points and open the solve calibration wizard 3 Create the GNSS control points and exit the wizard Receiver Info Access by tapping and holding the receiver in the GNSS Receivers screen or select Receiver Info from the Survey menu The Receiver Info screen shows the following Name Name of the receiver that is currently connected Model Receiver model Capabilities Icons show what the receiver is capable of T RTK rover operations A RTK base operations T Post processing operations Serial Number Receiver serial number Firmware Ver The firmware version the receiver is currently running Additional Information Depending on your brand and model additional information about the receiver may be displayed here Projection Calculator Survey Projection Calc The Projection Calculator wizard is used to calculate scale factor or convergence rotation for any point on the selected mapping plane You can
247. oint name that will be assigned to the next stored stake point Desc is the description that will be assigned to the next stored stake point HR is the height of the rod EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Take Shot triggers the total station to take a shot to the prism View opens the 3D View screen where a 3D view of the non reference DTM surface can be viewed from any angle as well as cut fill volume information between two selected surfaces Note The View button is only available when Generate DTM with Staked Points is checked in the first Stake DTM screen and at least three stake points have been stored that do not lie on a straight line lt Back returns to the first Stake DTM screen Store will store a stake point for the last point that was shot using the point name shown in the Point field and the description in the Desc field A new shot is not taken from this button The Point field is then advanced to the next available point name Station Staking Stakeout Station Staking The Station Staking routine allows you to stake the stations offsets and surfaces built into a LandXML file The first Station Staking screen is used to load a LandXML file and view the details of that file The box on the left displays
248. ol points and then the automatic blunder detection routine runs to detect obvious blunders in the solution If blunders are detected then you are prompted if you want to automatically remove the assigned points from the solution and resolve If you tap Yes the dimensions H and or V of the points detected as blunders will be unassigned and the calibration will be resolved If you tap No then the results will open with all points still assigned with their original dimension in the solution GNSS Resection Backsight Displays the current status of the solution Green Light If the calibration is solved and no blunders were detected you will see a green light and the status line will show the root mean squared RMS error of the horizontal and vertical solution Yellow Warning Triangle If the calibration is solved and no blunders were detected but some of the points used have a large residual error you will see a yellow triangle and the status line will show the point with the largest horizontal and or vertical residual Red Stop Sign If the calibration is solved and blunders were detected that could not be clearly identified or if you were prompted to remove blunders and you said no then you will see a red stop sign and the status line will indicate there are possible blunders in the solution Yellow Arrow If the calibration is solved but the control points are not spaced far enough apart to run the automatic blunder detection then yo
249. omputed PT point with the specified point name Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Delta is the deflection angle 193 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Three Point Curve Curve 3 Point Curve The Three Point Curve screen will compute the details of a curve when three points of the curve are specified the PC PT and any other point on the curve or the PC PT and radius point First point is the first point from the current job that defines the curve The specified point can be either the PC or the Radius Point by selecting the appropriate radio button Note The selection made for the first point determines the available choices in the remaining fields Pt on Curve is any point that lies on the curve between the PC and PT PC is the point that defines the beginning of the curve Point of Curvature PT is the point that defines the end of the curve Point of Tangency Store RP When checked the radius point will be computed and stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the curve based on the selected points Traverse opens the Traverse on Curve where the curve can be included in a traverse Layout opens the Curve Layout screen where the location of points on a curve can be computed at any station interval Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the
250. on a vertical parabolic curve when certain parts of the curve are known Known The PVC or PVI radio button is selected to define which point on the curve is known One of the following options must be selected from the dropdown list e Curve Length is selected when the length of the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified e Point On Curve is selected when the location of another point on the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified e Hi Lo Elevation is selected when the high or low point for the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified Note When the begin and end grades are both positive or both negative the high low elevation will not be located between the PVC and PVT 199 Survey Pro Help 5 00 PVC PVI Station is the station for the specified point PVC PVI Elevation is the elevation for the specified point Begin Grade is the grade at the tangent of the PVC End Grade is the grade at the tangent of the PVT Curve length is the length of the vertical curve the horizontal distance between the PVC and PVT Hi Lo Elevation is the elevation of the curve at the location where the tangent is zero the crest of the curve Station is the station where the other point is located on the curve Elevation is the elevation of the other point Solve computes the details for the vertical curve Layout opens the Parabolic Layout screen
251. on about the base to rover communications when the modem is a radio Receiver mode See the Receiver card Modem Reception Displays two values indicating the data modem signal quality This information is only displayed if the receiver is in rover mode Signal Latency Displays the age of the differential correction used in the current GNSS solution This value should be one second or less for good RTK solutions If this value is consistently greater than one second check the data modem link Reception Displays the receiver s estimation of the percent quality of the radio link Modem Settings Displays the current modem settings Channel The radio modem channel Sensitivity Displays the modem sensitivity squelch Configure Modem Opens the Radio Settings screen where you can change the radio channel and sensitivity settings Cell IP Modem The Cell IP Modem card displays information about the base to rover communications when the modem is a cell phone or internet modem Receiver mode See the Receiver card Modem Reception Displays two values indicating the data modem signal quality This information is only displayed if the receiver is in rover mode Signal Latency Displays the age of the differential correction used in the current GNSS solution This value should be one second or less for good RTK solutions If this value is consistently greater than one second check the data modem link Reception Displays the rec
252. on has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen Click here to view a summary of all the Stake Curve and Offset screens Screen Summary Screen 1 is used to define the primary curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the PC Point Screen 2 is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen 3 provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point Screen 4 is used to stake the current station Stake Out Point Store Tape Screen 156 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Stake Out Point Store Tape screen allows you to store a point at a specified offset from the stake point resulting in a point that is either closer to or further away from the total station Point is the name assigned to the new offset point Description is the description assigned to the new offset point Tape Out Tape In is the specified offset from the stake point A positive value will result in a new point that is further away from the total station The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point store
253. on will access the next existing point If the Increment is greater than one and the next point does not exist a warning is displayed gt Reference Pnt gt Reference Azm is the reference point azimuth used to determine the direction to the Next FS Point Solve gt computes the direction and distance to the Next FS Point and opens the next screen Where is Next Point Screen 2 This screen shows two graphics that indicate the direction and distance that the rod person must travel to reach the Next FS Point The clock style graphic shows the current rod location at the center a line in the 12 o clock position indicates the direction to the Reference and an arrow shows the direction to the Next FS Point There is also a text indicator that explains the direction to travel in a clock format The second graphic is a map view that shows the Current Rod Point the Reference and the Next FS Point It also shows the Occupy Point if the backsight has been set The lower left portion of the screen displays the azimuth from the rod to the Next FS Point and the horizontal distance between them lt Back returns you to the first screen Done closes the screen Navigation The Navigation routine allows you to navigate to existing points using autonomous positions from a GPS receiver that outputs a NMEA signal Most inexpensive consumer handheld GPS receivers will output the required signal The routine also allows you
254. on will take a final shot before proceeding to the next Stake Point screen Screen 3 Remote Staking Stakeout Stake Points Solve gt Stake gt 140 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Performing stake out in remote mode is different from running in a non remote mode because the feedback is continuous and provided in the rod s point of view instead of the total station s point of view When staking in remote mode the first four shots taken in a row where no distance is returned will result in a beep to warn that the instrument has possibly lost track of the prism Done when you are satisfied with the location of the prism this button will open the final Stake Points screen where the staked point can be stored Stake List of Points Screen Stakeout Stake List of Points The Stake List of Points screen is used to stake points from a specified list of points Points can also be selected by description or polyline To From opens a window where a range of points can be defined The points within the specified range can then be staked Tap Points displays a map of the current job Simply tap the points that you want to stake and then tap M Allows you to select points using a variety of other methods including select all points all control points all non control points by description or by polyline Design Point displays the point to be staked The initial Design Point is the first point of the selected poly
255. ons conventional and GNSS You will see a prompt showing you the agreement between this observation and the previous coordinate for the point If you accept the prompt the point will be updated with the new averaged coordinate Use Next Available Store the coordinates using the next available point name Note Certain points are protected and cannot be changed If you are taking an observation to a protected point the option to overwrite or compute average will not be available 74 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Remote Shot Screen Remote Mode Survey Traverse Sideshot Traverse or Side Shot When running in remote mode tapping the Traverse or Side Shot button from the Traverse Sideshot screen will open the Remote Shot screen The Remote Shot screen is identical to the Remote Control screen with the addition of a Take Shot button that allows you to trigger the total station to take a shot Take Shot After the total station is properly aiming toward the prism this will trigger the total station to take a shot If you are performing a side shot you will remain in the Remote Shot screen once the shot is completed If you are performing a traverse shot you will return to the Traverse Sideshot screen when the shot is completed Repetition Shots Survey Repetition Shots The Repetition Shots screen is used to perform side shots or traverse shots using any number of repetitions Note The sequence that the repeti
256. oom up vertically or zoom down vertically Stations allows you to scroll through and view all the stations in the LandXML file Surfaces allows you to scroll through and view all the surfaces in the LandXML file Offset allows you to scroll through and view the details of the node at the selected offset Tap Close to exit from this screen Station Staking Screen 2 Stakeout Station Staking Next gt The second Station Staking screen is used to configure which Station Surface and Offset you want to stake Use the corresponding and buttons to scroll the available Station Surface and Offset that you want to stake 164 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Height of Rod is the rod height Backsight opens the Station Setup screen where you can set your backsight lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the next Station Staking screen Station Staking Screen 3 Stakeout Station Staking Next gt Solve gt The third Station Staking screen shows the direction and distance information from the instrument to the selected stake point The Station Surface and Offset information is displayed at the top of the screen From Instrument to Design Point lists the direction and distance information used to aim the total station toward the stake point Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the des
257. open when exporting coordinates to a CRS coordinate file CRS File Options specifies if the resulting file should be Sequential or Non Sequential The HP 48 data collector can only use sequential coordinate files lt Back returns to the previous screen Export exports the selected coordinates to the new CRS file Export TXT Coordinates Since the coordinates in an ASCII TXT file can be stored in a variety of formats two screens are used to define the format of the resulting file Delimiters is the character that separates each column of text in the ASCII file Coordinates is used to select if the resulting coordinates should be plane coordinates geodetic coordinates in degrees minutes seconds format or geodetic coordinates in decimal format Units are the distance units that will be written to the resulting TXT file These units are automatically set to the same units that are set for the current job Headers in the first row When checked a heading describing each column is inserted in the first row For example the following header could be inserted Name Northing Easting Elevation Description lt Back returns to the previous screen Survey Pro Help 5 00 Next gt opens the second screen Export TXT Coordinates Format Select the desired order and format for the resulting TXT file from the list of options Finish exports the selected points to the TXT file Export CSV Coordinates
258. or the location s entered e Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Begin point or location to the End point or location 180 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Cogo Menu The Cogo Menu contains all of the coordinate geometry routines used to perform computations from the existing job data The following screens are available from the Cogo Menu Point in Direction Intersection Offset Line Offset Points Station Offset Corner Angle Compute Area Surface Area Triangle Solutions Map Check Index Subdivide Area HD VD to SD ZA SD ZA to HD VD Architectural Units Conversion Average Points Main Index Map Check Index Map Check Add Edit Line Add Edit Curve Add to Map Cogo Menu Index Main Index Point in Direction Cogo Point in Direction The Point in Direction screen will calculate and store the position of a new point after providing a distance and direction from a known point From point is the point name of the reference point used for locating the new point Azimuth Bearing is the direction from the reference point to the new point Angle is the angle added to the Azimuth Bearing to modify the direction to the new point Note To subtract an angle from the specified azimuth or bearing enter a negative Angle value 181 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Horiz Dist is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the refere
259. ordinates Displays the local coordinates computed using the current measurement and the latest projection solution Solution Quality Displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GNSS Status screen Errors Displays the differences between the computed local coordinates and the known coordinates for the control point Note If the Errors are larger than the measurement precision of the instrument you probably have a problem with your projection solution Session Time Displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status Displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap Accept while the number of epochs is averaged in the software Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver GNSS Status Opens the GNSS Status screen Accept Writes the results to raw data and returns you to the Control Points screen Occupy Control Point The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to a known project point The most common use of this screen is to measure control points for the calibration solution This screen is also used by the Calibration Calculator routine for one
260. ored without feature codes or auto linework control codes If you have prompt for Feature and Attributes set on the Surveying Settings card you will still be prompted for feature codes for regular observation points Enter Key Triggers a Topo Observation or a standard observation depending on the Survey Map Use Enter Button for Topo setting on the Surveying Settings card of the Job Settings Manage Basemaps 228 Survey Pro Help 5 00 From the Map View tap The Manage Basemaps screen is used to select the basemaps to display in the map view for the current job The main portion of the screen lists the names of all the basemaps that have been added to the current job The other columns display if each basemap is visible and the number of elements in a vector basemaps Note You can toggle the visibility of a basemap by tapping on the Visible column of the basemap list Add allows you to select additional basemaps for the current job Edit opens the Edit Basemap screen described below where you can preview or edit the selected basemap Raster basemaps cannot be edited Remove removes the selected basemap from the list The source file will not be removed Move Up will move the selected basemap up one level in the list Consult the User s manual for information on how to manage basemaps Move Down will move the selected basemap down one level in the list Orient opens the Orient Basemap wizard where
261. orm a different function depending on the field selected Note The arrow keys can also be used to move the cursor between fields Allow Alphanumeric Point Names When checked numeric or alpha character can be used for point names If unchecked only numeric point names are valid Beep When Storing Points When checked a beep will sound whenever a new point is stored Beep On Control Activation When checked a beep occurs when any button checkbox or other control is tapped Prompt for Description When checked a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus 42 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described earlier Prompt for Picture When checked a prompt will appear before storing a point where you have the option of taking one or more pictures associated with the current point Only available when running on a Nomad or a Ranger 3 with a digital camera Prompt to Backup When Closing Job When checked you
262. ot was already performed the Next gt button will be enabled Tapping Shoot again will throw out the results of the last shot and re shoot it Next gt Used to take the next required shot in the routine The button label will contain additional information to help indicate which shot is required next Distance Offset Survey Distance Offset The Distance Offset screen is used to store a new point that is a known distance away from the rod location This screen is useful when the rod cannot occupy the new point s location Foresight The point name that will be stored Desc The description for the offset shot that is stored HR The length of the rod Z i Opens the Smart Target options Offset The offset distance that is to the left when L is selected or right when R is selected of the prism from the total station s point of view Horz Dist Offset The offset distance that is beyond the prism positive value or in front of the prism negative value from the total station s point of view Elevation Offset The offset distance that is below the prism negative value or above the prism positive value Note Multiple offsets can be applied simultaneously Shoot Take a shot to the prism apply the offset s entered and then store the new point Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where the current backsight can be modified T A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen 77 Survey
263. ous with RTK then you should set the recording interval on the Set Base Receiver screen and or the Set Rover Receiver screen when starting a RTK survey Static Receiver Session Survey Post Processing Start gt or Survey Occupy The Static Receiver Session is used to enter the station name and antenna height for a static post processing occupation This screen opens up after you have started a static session with the Post Processing Start screen or if you tap Survey Occupy and you are connected to a receiver that is already logging static data Point Enter the station name for the static session Description Enter the description for the static session Antenna Displays antenna setup for this receiver Set HR Opens up the Receiver Antenna screen where you can modify the antenna type and measurement for this receiver Apply Sends the current station and antenna information to the receiver Note Some receivers cannot change the station name and antenna height of a session once it is started therefore this button may be disabled depending on your brand and model and the state of the current post processing survey End Survey Ends the static point occupation and closes the file Start Stop Go Survey Start Stop Go When you are starting a stop and go post processing survey you will first be prompted to select a receiver with the Connect to Post Process Receiver screen Stop Go Receiver Session Sur
264. p 5 00 GNSS Receiver Settings Receiver Communication Add Receiver Data Modem Settings Card Modem Serial Communications Radio Settings Cell Phone Settings Screen IP Modem Settings Screen General Receiver Settings Network Settings Measure Mode Settings Post Process Settings Job Menu Index Main Index Edit Points Index Edit Points Edit Points Multiple Point Editing Edit Point Edit Points General Edit Point Location Point Feature Attributes Job Menu Index Main Index Edit Polylines Index Edit Polylines Edit Polylines New Polyline Edit Polylines Polyline Editor Edit Polylines Add Edit Curve Job Menu Index Main Index Edit Alignment Index Edit Alignments Add Edit Alignments Edit Alignments Edit Segment Edit Segment Line Card Edit Segment Arc Edit Segment Spiral Card Edit Segment Vertical Grade Card Edit Segment Vertical Curve 21 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Job Menu Index Main Index View Raw Data Index View Raw Data Find Point Edit Station Edit Target Edit GNSS Base Edit GNSS Antenna Job Menu Index Main Index DTM Index View DTM Layers for Staking DTM Choose Polyline Add Edit Break lines Edit Break lines Polylines Points on DTM Layer 3D View 3D View Settings Job Menu Index Main Index Instrument Settings Job Settings The Settings screen consists of several separate screens where each individual screen accesses different types of settings Tap o
265. pe They will include e Central Longitude Latitude Enter the geodetic origin of the map projection e False Northing Easting Enter the coordinate offsets at the origin of the map projection e Scale factor Enter the scale factor of the map projection e N S Parallel Enter the north and south standard parallels of the map projection Azimuth Enter azimuth of the central line of the map projection Key In Zone Oblique Mercator Settings The Key In Zone Oblique Mercator screen is sued to set extra parameters when the Zone Type is set to Oblique Mercator Angle Azimuth At Enter the convention for projection azimuth The options are e Equator e Center of Projection Origin At Enter the convention for projection azimuth The options are e Equator e Center of Projection Rectify Coordinates Set if the coordinates are rectified Coordinates are rectified if the local plane is rotated by the azimuth angle of the central meridian of the projection so that grid North lines up with geodetic north at the origin Key In Zone Ellipse The Key In Zone Ellipse screen is used to set or create an ellipse for a new datum This screen is only displayed when Datum Type is Molodensky or Similarity Choose an ellipse for the new zone Ellipse from Data Base Choose this option to use the selected data base ellipsoid Key in Ellipse Choose this option to enter the values for the custom ellipsoid 124 Survey Pro Help 5 0
266. points that are being used to compute the average location If any points residual values exceed your tolerances you can uncheck that point and a new average is computed that 190 Survey Pro Help 5 00 excludes that point Result Displays the average coordinates of all the selected points These coordinates are automatically updated when changes are made in the lower portion of the screen without the need to tap Solve Use Elevation from Point When checked and if storing the point the elevation for the computed point will be the elevation of the point selected here When unchecked the average elevation of all the selected points will be displayed and used if storing the average point Store Point When checked the average location computed will be saved to the point specified in the associated field after solving If unchecked nothing is saved when solving lt Back Returns to the previous screen Solve If the Store Point box is checked this will save a new point with the computed average coordinates otherwise this simply closes the screen 191 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Curve Menu The Curve Menu contains routines that will compute all aspects of a horizontal curve and assist in curve layout Curve Solution Known PI and Tangents Three Point Curve Compute Radius Point Line Tangent to Circles Horizontal Curve Layout Traverse on Curve Parabolic Curve Parabolic Layout Straight Grade Spiral Spiral Layou
267. previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen 5 Height of Rod is the length of the rod Design Elev displays the current design elevation which can be modified with the Change button FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must move forward toward the total station or backward away from the total station Go RIGHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must move to the right or left from the total station s point of view EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store opens the next screen Store Tape opens the Stake Out Point Tape Offset screen where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo SS stores a side shot
268. r at the reference point Combined Scale Factor Displays the Mapping Plane Scale Factor multiplied by the Ellipsoid Scale Factor This is the ground to grid scale factor Inverse Combined Factor Displays the inverse of the Combined Scale Factor This is the grid to ground scale factor and is the value used in the calibration solution lt Back Returns you to the previous Projection Calculator screen Accept Copies the two computed values to past results and returns you to the Main Menu File Management Survey File Management The File Management routine is used to manage post processing files on a supported GNSS receiver The routine can delete post processing files from the receiver or recover files that were recently deleted Post processing files can also be copied or moved from the receiver to the data collector for more convenient transfers to a PC Active Files tab The Active Files tab lists the details of all the files that are currently on the connection target e If connected to the receiver the files on the receiver s internal memory are listed e If connected to the SD card it shows all SP1 files in the SD card slots 131 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Files can be selected from this list to delete or copy move to the data collector Connected To The drop down list shows the current connection mode The states are Receiver and SD Card e If you change from SD Card to Receiver the system attempts to connect to the ac
269. r elevation and result in a smoother change going into and coming out of a super elevation similar to how a spiral curve is used with a horizontal curve Note One half of the parabolic transition length will extend before and after the starting point and or the ending point of the super elevation This should be considered when using parabolic transitions near the end of an alignment since this length cannot extend beyond the limits of the road Hinge on Center Edge determines if the super elevation is computed by rotating the road around the centerline or the road s edge Note When hinging on edge the road is actually rotated around the end of the first segment of the template that leads into the super elevation Only the first segment is adjusted with a super elevation The length and slope of any segments beyond the first will not be adjusted from a super elevation Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen Road Stakeout Roads Road Stakeout The Stake Road screen is used to stake any segment of a road profile at any station Use Station Equation When checked the current station equation will be applied to the road Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen where a station equation can be configured Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road Begin Station di
270. r of points together to form a GNSS control point One of the points must be a local grid point and one point must be a GNSS point Use as Calibration Control Point check this box if you wish to use the selected point as a GNSS calibration control point GNSS Point Grid Point choose a point to pair with the selected point to form a calibration point pair Use for Horizontal Calibration check this box if the calibration point pair is suitable to use for horizontal calibration 45 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Use for Vertical Calibration check this box if the calibration point pair is suitable to use for vertical calibration Edit Point Feature Job Edit Points Edit Feature The Feature card is used to modify the feature code and line work control code associated with the point Any feature codes for the selected point are shown in the list of codes Each line of the list of codes shows e Code Icon Icon for the code If you are using a FXL feature file this icon will show whether the code is for a point feature or a line feature If you are not using a FXL feature file or if this code is not defined in the FXL file the icon will be blank showing that it is a user entered feature e Code Name The abbreviated code string for this code Line work Icon An icon representing the state of the auto line work for the point with this code e Attribute If this code also has feature attributes defined for it the at
271. radio channel and sensitivity settings Modems where you cannot configure COM settings but can configure channel settings Channel Displays the last radio channel when applicable Sensitivity Displays the last radio sensitivity when applicable Configure Establishes communication with the radio firmware and opens the Radio Settings screen where you can change the radio channel and sensitivity settings Cellphone modem settings Serial Port fields Baudrate Displays the baud rate the receiver uses to communicate with the cellphone Parity Displays the parity the receiver uses to communicate with the cellphone Serial Port Displays the serial port the receiver uses to communicate with the cellphone Configure Opens the Modem Serial Comms screen where you can change the settings for communication between the receiver and the cellphone Select modem fields Select Modem Select the specific cellphone modem that applies Edit Modem Edit the existing modem parameters Manage Modem Manage saved GSM modems Base Phone Enter the telephone number of the RTK base receiver s cell phone Internet Protocol modem settings 27 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Serial Port fields Baudrate Displays the baud rate the receiver uses to communicate with the cellphone Parity Displays the parity the receiver uses to communicate with the cellphone Serial Port Displays the serial port the receiver uses to communicate with the cellphone
272. re prompted Accepts opens the third and final Stake Points screen where the current stake point can be staked and optionally stored When post processing and in Occupying mode this button will be labeled Store and will signal the end of the occupation and store the point Stake to Line Stakeout Stake to Line The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate points on a continuous predefined line Direction information is provided to locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance a perpendicular offset to the line between the rover and the line The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See the conventional method for details Stake to Line Screen 2 The second screen is where measurements take place and the staking directions are displayed The graphic and display direct you to points on line via the shortest route a perpendicular offset from the rover to the line The graphic display will change depending on how close you are to the specified line 171 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view GNSS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver If this area of the
273. recording all shots performed from the total station Stop Stops record mode Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where the current backsight can be modified a A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Remote Elevation Survey Remote Elevation The Remote Elevation screen will compute the elevation for the occupy point by shooting a foresight with a known elevation or it will compute the elevation for a foresight when the occupy elevation is known 83 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Known Elevation Is Where you specify if the Occupy point or the Foresight point has a known elevation Elevation The known elevation for the selected point Shoot Defines if you want to perform a Direct shot only or Direct amp Reverse shots to the foresight HR The length of the rod Z i Opens the Smart Target options Store Pt When checked the elevation of the point specified here will be replaced with the computed elevation Take Shot Computes the elevation for the point that had an unknown elevation and optionally writes that elevation to the specified Store Pt Results OCC Elevation Displays the elevation for the occupy point FS Elevation Displays the elevation for the foresight point Check Point Survey Check Point The Check Point screen compares the rod location with an existing point in the project This routine is similar to the Check Setup routine and is used to verify that the rod and or the to
274. rn to the Navigation screen Points Currently Used in Best Fit lists the points that are used in the Best Fit solution This section is hidden when no best points have been collected You can toggle the points used in the best fit solution by tapping on the Use for H 168 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Control column of the point list If you toggle the best fit point assignments you can then tap the Resolve with Existing Points button to update the best fit solution 169 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Stakeout Menu for GPS Stake Points Stake to Line Stake to Line Screen 2 Offset Staking Index Slope Staking Slope Staking Screen 4 Point Slope Staking Index Line and Offset Curve and Offset Spiral and Offset Show Station and Offset Show Station and Offset Screen 2 Store Offset Points Stake DTM DTM GNSS Shot Station Staking Index Define Location Index Where is Next Point Navigation Main Index Stake Points GNSS Staking Stakeout Stake Points The GPS Staking screen is used to navigate to a design point with the receiver in roving mode Once the design point has been staked this screen is also used to control static occupations for the most precise measurement to the as built point The first two screens of this routine are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button on the first screen and the Circle Zero button on the second screen are replaced with a Setup HR button to con
275. rojection Prompt before the Set Base Receiver screen opens Projection Prompt The Projection Prompt screen is used to select the projection mode to use for this survey Note If you have previously checked the Don t Ask Me Again check box this screen is skipped Use Ground Calibration gt Tap to launch the Start Survey wizard in default ground calibration mode The Start Survey workflow set base rover collect control and solve calibration will define the projection In this mode the next step will be to select to use a geoid model with the Select Geoid screen Select a Mapping Plane gt Tap to launch the Select Coordinate System screen You must select a mapping plane zone to continue Once you have selected a coordinate system the Start Survey wizard advances to the next screen Don t Ask Me Again Check to start the survey with the method selected above and subsequent instances of the start survey workflow will skip this prompt and start with the chosen method Note To reset all optional messages tap Reset Optional Messages on the General Settings screen 105 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Select Geoid Start Survey Survey Projection Prompt or Survey Projection Select Geoid The Select Geoid screen is used to choose a geoid model to use with the default ground calibration coordinate system Use a geoid model Is where you select if you want to use a geoid Leave this box unchecked if you want to use ellipso
276. rom a survey measurement you must first go to the Edit Points screen and insert a copy of that point HI Enter the height of instrument for this setup 53 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Backsight Enter the backsight azimuth or backsight point name for this setup Note If you wish to change the backsight point you can only choose a user entered point key in or imported If you wish to use a point derived from a survey measurement you must first go to the Edit Points screen and insert a copy of that point Apply PPM Check this box if you wish to apply a PPM correction to measured slope distances Enter the PPM correction factor in the edit box Calculate Survey Pro On Board only Opens up the Calculate PPM screen Earth Curvature and Refraction Set the earth curvature and refraction correction coefficient Select None to turn earth curvature and refraction correction off for all observations from this station setup Raw Data Edit Calculate PPM Job View Raw Data Edit Station Calculate Survey Pro On Board only The Calculate PPM screen allows you to calculate the PPM correction factor from the given temperature and pressure inputs Pressure Enter the atmospheric pressure and set the units for pressure Temperature Enter the temperature and set the units for temperature PPM The calculated PPM value Calculate triggers the instrument to calculate the PPM correction factor from the given pressure and t
277. rwrite or use the next available point You will not have the option to store an observation Set HR Displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data quick code point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping Set HR to open the Receiver Antenna screen Tapping any of the buttons will store a point with the description of the button label If the Occupy Point in Quick Codes box is checked on the Job Settings Surveying card the receiver is put into static mode and the Occupy Data Points screen opens If the box is not checked the point will be stored with a single epoch of data from the receiver 117 Survey Pro Help 5 00 without going into static occupation mode The point is stored with the description labeled on the button for example Ditch or TOPO You can also tap Enter to store a point with the last used description Note Storing points in this routine does not change the last user specified description used in any survey routine Note To enter a new description or edit an existing button description in the Quick Codes screen tap and hold the button The Quick Code button labels are saved in the Program Files Survey Pro QuickCodes ini file You can copy these files from one data collector to another to preload the list
278. s The Date Time Settings card is used to set the date and time in the data collector Time Displays the current time Date Displays the current date Format Select Local to display your local time or UTC to display Coordinated Universal Time DUT Correction The polar wandering correction factor in seconds used to convert UTC to UT1 UT1 UTC DUT Note The date time and UTC are computed using Window CE s Date Time properties Set Date Sets the system date with the date that is entered Set Time Sets the system time with the time entered Synchronize Zeros the fractional portion of the current time and advance to the nearest second so that the time can be set more accurately NMEA GPS Settings The NMEA GPS card is used to configure the settings fora NMEA GPS receiver for use with the GeoLock and Navigation routines 40 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Turn On NMEA GPS Receiver When checked enables the GPS receiver Model Select Shared GPS to use the GPS receiver settings configured in the Windows operating system see Shared GPS below or select Generic NMEA and configure the settings from this screen Serial Port The serial port on the data collector used to communicate with the GPS receiver Device available only when using a Bluetooth GPS receiver and Bluetooth is selected for the Serial Port Select the Bluetooth device that represents your GPS receiver here Bluetooth available only when using a Blu
279. s This will display the following additional cut fill and location information e Type of slope e g left right cut fill e Design and observed slope ratios run over rise e Design and actual stations e HD and Cut Fill to Hinge Point HD and Cut Fill to Center Line e If applicable HD and Cut Fill to Edge of Pavement and Edge of Curb Name of segment and HD and Cut Fill to that segment extremity Road Slope Stake only Note The Results button is only available from the Store Catch Point screen Screen 5 below when using GNSS or Remote mode which is accessed after tapping Store gt The button described below selects which information is displayed on the screen from the following options e Vertical Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point Horizontal Map displays an overhead view of the job e Shot Data displays the shot data for the latest shot The button described below selects the type of slope that will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options e Automatic Slope selects the slope that is nearest to the current rod position 149 Survey Pro Help 5 00 e Force CUT Slope forces
280. s entered to be included in the description list Add New Descriptions to Description List Marking this item results in only new descriptions entered since marking this box to be included in the description list If the preceding box is marked new descriptions are added whether or not this item is marked Show Description List Automatically Marking this item results in a drop down list of descriptions being displayed as soon as text is entered into a Description If unmarked the list can be displayed by selecting Show Description List using the x power button associated with a Description field Double clicking a description in the list will replace the entered text with the selected description Surveying Settings The Surveying Settings card allows you to select various options that affect how data collection is performed Prompt for PPM during Station Setup When checked you will be prompted to enter the PPM correction factor as part of your conventional station setup Prompt for Description When checked a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu Note Descriptions can be no longer than 256 characters Prompt for Height of Rod When checked a prompt for the rod height will appear before any new point is stored Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the 35 Survey Pro Help 5 00 rout
281. s good horizontal coordinates to use for horizontal control when localizing V Select this option if the point has a good elevation to use for vertical control when localizing Set HR Opens the Receiver Antenna screen where you can change the antenna setup and update the receiver Start Control Point Occupy Opens the Occupy Control Point screen Note A GNSS Control point is made up of a pair of job points which are linked together One of the job points must be a grid point The grid point can be derived from a key in or imported grid coordinate or from a conventional measurement The other job point must be a GNSS point The GNSS point can be derived from a key in or imported geodetic coordinate or from a GNSS measurement Check GNSS Resection Backsight The Check GNSS Resection Backsight screen is used to occupy a check point in order to verify the quality of the calibration solution GNSS Resection Backsight The points used for the Resection base setup on a new point or the Backsight base setup on an existing point are shown in the display Occupy Check gt Opens the Occupy Check Setup screen to select an existing job file point and initiate an occupation to check the calibration When you have occupied a check point for horizontal and vertical solutions the Solve Calibration screen will open Start Now Solves the calibration with the current control points and opens the Data Collection screen This calibration solu
282. s the Edit Segment screen where the selected horizontal segment can be modified Remove Removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment Note The station and azimuth at the beginning of the selected horizontal segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen 49 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Edit Alignment Screen VAL Tab The VAL Vertical ALignment tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the vertical details of an alignment Note The total horizontal length of the VAL must be equal to or greater than the total horizontal length of the HAL when the alignment is used for road layout Insert Opens the Edit Segment screen where a new vertical segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment Edit Opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected vertical segment can be modified Remove Removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment Note The station and elevation at the beginning of the selected vertical segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen Edit Alignment Screen POB Tab The POB Point Of Beginning tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to define the starting location of the alignment The first horizontal and vertical segment will always begin at this location Location Starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified North East and Ele
283. s the angle to turn to the current station e PI to Station is the distance from the PI to the current station Tangent Offset provides perpendicular offset information from the tangent the line from the PC to the PI for each station on the curve The results are given in the following format e Station is the current station on the curve e Tan dist TD is the distance on the tangent from the PC to the PI or the PI to the PT where the perpendicular offset occurs e Tan offset is the distance perpendicular to the tangent to the curve at the particular station e Tan is the length of the tangent the distance from the PC to the PI Tan TD is the distance on the tangent from the PI to the PC or the PI to the PT where the offset occurs Chord Offset provides perpendicular offset information from the chord the line from the PC to the PT for each station on the curve PC deflection information is also provided The results are given in the following format Station is the current station on the curve e Chord dist is the distance on the long chord from the PC toward the PT where the perpendicular offset occurs Chord offset is the distance to the current station on the curve perpendicular to the long chord PC Deflection is the angle to turn to the current station as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI e Chord Length is the distance from the PC to the current station on the curve The first know
284. s the new offset point Stake Spiral and Offset Stakeout Spiral and Offset The Stake Spiral and Offset screen allows you to stake stations at fixed intervals on a spiral curve or at an offset to it Start Point is the point associated with the beginning of the spiral curve This can either be the TS or the CS which is specified later in this screen see below Tangent Azm Tangent Bearing defines the tangent azimuth or bearing at the entrance to the spiral Radius Degree Arc Degree Chord defines the radius degree arc or degree chord of the curve respectively Length is the length of the spiral curve Begin Station is the station associated with the Start Point Turn defines if the curve turns toward the Left or Right from the point of view of the Start Point Spiral defines the direction of the spiral curve by the following options e TS to SC the spiral begins at the tangent Tangent to Spiral and ends at the circular curve Spiral to Curve e CS to ST the spiral begins at the circular curve Curve to Spiral and ends at the tangent Spiral to Tangent Stake Spiral and Offset Screen 2 Station to Stake is the desired station on the spiral curve that you want to stake Station Interval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Sta button is pressed Next Sta advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset from th
285. s the number of basemaps in the current job and the filenames associated with them Attributes Collected Displays the number of point and line attributes used in the current project Pictures Displays the number of pictures used in the current project Total Storage Displays the total amount of memory that is installed on the data collector Available Storage Displays the amount of free memory that is available to use for jobs Wasted Space Displays the amount of empty space that is being used by the current job This space can be recovered as described below Recover Wasted Space Now As you add and remove points and lines in a job empty gaps can result within the job file These gaps use storage space This button will remove any gaps in the job file thus recovering the wasted space Note The software checks for low memory situations every minute When the available system memory falls below 256K of RAM a warning is displayed Calculator Job Calculator or l Calculator where applicable The Calculator screen behaves exactly like any other RPN format calculator It consists of a stack that can contain any number of values and buttons that perform various operations When a value is being entered from the keypad it is displayed in a special area called the active area This value is then place in Level 1 of the stack after tapping the Enter key Tapping a button on the display performs the corresponding operation on either the l
286. s will automatically be stored after traveling the specified horizontal or 3D distance Each successive point name is incremented to the next available name Hold Still For After accepting the first point additional points are automatically stored when the pole is held in the same spot for the specified interval of time in seconds e Manual prompt once Stores points in the same way as tapping Topo SS from the Data Collection screen incrementing the point name after each stored point Manual prompt every point Performs the same function as the Manual Prompt Once routine above except you are prompted for a new description layer and feature code with each point stored Interval Enter the interval criteria used for continuous collection modes The Interval field is not available if either of the manual methods is selected Update Rate Set the receiver to 1 Hz or 5 Hz mode When 5 Hz is selected the receiver will compute positions five times a second so the display will update in near real time and measurement latency will be minimized Start Opens the Occupy Data Points screen where data can be collected Note If you hotkey to another screen while using the Feature Collection routine the Feature Collection screen will be suspended until you return to it 113 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Offset Shots Survey Data Collection Offset The Offset Shots screen is used to collect a point you cannot physically occupy wit
287. se a Centerline 137 Survey Pro Help 5 00 StakeDTM Screen 2 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Station Staking Index Station Staking Cross Section View Station Staking Screen 2 Station Staking Screen 3 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Define a Location Index Define a Location Define a Location Screen 2 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Next Point Index Where is Next Point Where is Next Point Screen 2 Stakeout Menu Index Main Index Stake Points Stakeout Stake Points The Stake Points screen allows you to stake a single point or a series of points Design Point is the name of the first point that you want to stake Increment when advancing to the next point the point number is incremented by the value entered here A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt advances the current Design Point by the Increment value If that point does not exist and the Increment value 1 the Design Point is advanced to the next existing point Height of Rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Station Setup screen 138 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Solve gt takes you to the second Stake Points screen where the distance and direction to the design point is displayed see below M1 opens the Stakeout Settings screen Stake Points Screen 2 Design point displays the name of the design point that was entered in the first screen
288. sed to set the units of the DXF basemap Distance Units Set the distance units of the DXF basemap The map will be converted from these units to job units for display and object selection Preview Card The Preview card shows a preview of how the selected basemap will look in the map view Orientation Card DXF basemaps only The Orientation card allows you to toggle the DXF orientation on or off Basemap Orientation Wizard Manage Basemaps Orient This wizard is used to calculate a shift and rotation of a DXF basemap to the job file coordinates Choose two points from the job then choose two matching locations from the DXF basemap Accept Applies the transformation to the display of the map in the map control Note The orientation of the DXF basemap applies only a shift and rotation from the DXF coordinates to the job coordinates The DXF coordinates are not scaled Smart Targets Tap a iy power button next to a Z indicating a prism Smart Target is currently selected or indicating a reflectorless Smart Target is currently selected This item is available from any screen where the rod height can be adjusted Smart Targets provide a convenient way to work with different prisms and or target types on the same job See the User s Manual for more information Quickly change to any available user configured smart target by tapping it from the upper portion of the list The active Smart Target is marked with a Man
289. sed when you select either Key in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page Reference Point Location Local Displays the local Latitude Longitude and Height of the ground origin point Scale Factor Displays the inverse combined scale factor for this ground setup This scale factor is automatically calculated based on the local ground origin Override scale factor Where you can over ride the scale factor Check this control to enable the scale factor edit field and enter any other scale factor Ground Coordinates Location 126 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The Ground Coordinates Location screen is used to define the local ground coordinate of the origin point This coordinate will be used to calculate an offset from the mapping plane grid coordinates so that you can separate the grid and ground coordinates to make them recognizable This screen is used when you select either Key in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page Reference Point Location Grid Displays the local northing and easting of the ground origin Desired Local Ground Coordinate Desired local northing and easting coordinate of the ground origin Ground Coordinates Results The Ground Coordinates Results screen is used to preview the values to be used for the ground coordinate system This screen displays the parameters for the ground coordinate system If the origin was set to use either Key in coordi
290. set the correction format or Network either by setting the base with this instance of the Start Survey workflow or if you are reconnecting to the rover to resume a survey then the Correction Format field displays the format currently in use Connect gt Connects to the selected receiver and advanced to the Set Rover Receiver screen Note If you have not already selected your projection mode you will be prompted to do so with the Projection Prompt before the Set Rover Receiver screen opens Set Rover Receiver The Set Rover Receiver screen is used to enter the rover receiver antenna and setup the rover receiver hardware Rover Receiver Displays information about the status of the receiver Antenna Type Select the antenna type to use Setup Tap to change the antenna for the base receiver See Receiver Antenna Measure To Specify the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured Enter the distance from the ground to the Measured To location Post Processing Recording Interval Sets the period for logging GNSS raw data for RTK post processing Set it to Off to disable post processing data collection 111 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Next gt Tap to advance to the Select Base Point at Rover screen Select Base Point At Rover The Select Base Point at Rover screen is used to choose the point in the job file where the base is located or to store a new point for the base receiver setup locat
291. sm and lock onto it e LockNGo Lock onto a prism and follow it e Stop Stop tracking prism Store There are two options e Store Store the staked point with a description e Store Sideshot Store the point just shot as a sideshot point with sideshot raw data records but not as a staked point Note The Design point name will be incremented by 1 to allow convenient staking of the next point The following icons may appear Green arrow left GO LEFT within Point Tolerance you specified in Stakeout Settings Green arrow right GO RIGHT within Point Tolerance you specified in Stakeout Settings Yellow arrow left GO LEFT larger than Point Tolerance less than 0 3 meters 1 foot in horizontal distance Yellow arrow right GO RIGHT larger than Point Tolerance less than 0 3 meters or 1 foot in horizontal distance Red arrow left GO LEFT larger than than 0 3 meters or 1 foot in horizontal distance Red arrow right GO RIGHT larger than than 0 3 meters or 1 foot in horizontal distance Green arrow down COME within Point Tolerance you specified in Stakeout Settings Green arrow up GO within Point Tolerance you specified in Stakeout Settings Yellow arrow down COME larger than Point Tolerance less than 0 3 meters 1 foot in horizontal distance Yellow arrow up GO larger than Point Tolerance less than 0 3 meters or 1 foot in horizontal distance Red arrow down COME larger than 0 3 meters or 1 foot
292. splays the station assigned to the beginning of the road End Station displays the final station in the road Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen Next gt takes you to the next Stake Road screen where a specific point on the road can be selected to stake Stake Road Screen 2 The second Stake Road screen displays a cross sectional profile view of the road at the current station Any particular point on this view can be selected and staked 213 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Station Interval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Station button is pressed Next Station advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval 5 gt These buttons are used to select the particular node or an offset to it from your road profile that you wish to stake The segment name at the selected node is also displayed If staking the centerline with an offset the side of the road that the offset occurs is also displayed Offset When checked allows you to specify an offset distance to stake as opposed to staking the actual node locations Note A positive value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node away from the centerline A nega
293. st aim toward so that it is facing the current station Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the current station Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the current station ZE to Rod is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 A new backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The Circle Zero button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Summary Screen is used to define the primary spiral curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the 158 Survey Pr
294. st be selected from this list prior to changing its settings from the lower half of the screen Assignment Within Survey Program Select the function for the selected button when it is used within the software The function of the button will switch back to its global assignment when it is used outside the software Selecting lt Global gt from this field will result in the global assignment also being used from within the software Global Assignment Select the function for the selected button when it is used outside the software Survey Defaults Set all assignments in the Assignment Within Survey Program field to the software s default settings System Defaults Set all assignments in the Global Assignment field to the system default settings and set all the assignments in the Assignment Within Survey Program field to lt Global gt General Settings The General Settings card contains the following miscellaneous settings Auto time stamp every When checked a note will be entered into the survey file consisting of the current time each time the number of minutes specified passes This can help track when specific events occurred Remind to backup job every When checked a prompt will occur each time the specified number of hours passes reminding you to backup your job Use Enter Key to Move Between Fields When checked the Enter key will move the cursor to the next field in all screens When unchecked the Enter key will perf
295. st shot and the corresponding hinge point HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point Cut to HP Fill to HP is the cut or fill required to bring the current rod location level with the hinge point To Slope Offset is the perpendicular offset between the rod location and the horizontal line from the hinge point to the catch point Direction CW or CCW is the horizontal angle clockwise or counterclockwise respectively that the rod must turn around the hinge point for it to be over the line from the hinge point to the catch point Below DS Above DS is the vertical distance that the rod is located below or above the design slope If the Automatic Slope option is selected this will be the distance to the nearest slope otherwise it will be the distance to the selected cut or fill slope Toward HP Away HP is the estimated horizontal distance the rod must move toward or away from the hinge point before it is over the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken this value will be blank EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Results This will open the Slope Staking Results screen listing detailed information for the
296. survey file the Save As screen is opened where the file name and location is entered for the new survey file Export JOB Coordinates When exporting to another JOB file the Save As screen is opened where the file name and location is entered for the new JOB file Export a Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW file pair This option is used to export the Survey Pro version 5 survey file contents as a Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW 14 Survey Pro Help 5 00 file pair which you could then import into third party software that uses the old format Survey Pro files If your job does not have any auto line work feature codes or any feature code attributes the Save As screen is opened where the file name and location is entered for the JOB RAW file pair If your job does have auto line work or feature code attributes you will see the Job Raw Export Settings Screen where you can specify how you want your codes to be converted into the RAW file Export Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW Settings This screen is used to specify how to translate your auto linework codes into the RAW file Export Codes in Foresight Format use this option to export your codes to be parsed by Foresight office software Export Codes in 3rd party Format use this option to export your codes to be parsed by common third party software Export opens the Save As where the file name and location is entered Export CR5 Coordinates The Export CR5 screen will
297. t 82 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Description The description given to the next stored point HR The length of the rod Z x Opens the Smart Target options Number of Sets The desired number of sets required when shooting each foresight You must select at least one set Traverse Prompts you to shoot the Foresight point After each set is performed the Move To Other End dialog box will open and prompt you to set up on the new point and enter a new instrument and rod height The Traverse Wizard screen will then open to guide you through the setup on the forward point BS Setup Opens the Station Setup screen where the current backsight can be modified H A shortcut to the Surveying Settings and Repetition Settings screens Record Mode Survey Record Mode When running in Record Mode all control of the total station is performed from the total station s keypad The data collector will simply log each shot that is taken from the total station This routine is typically used for topo work where the total station remains over a single occupy point during all shots Note Not all total stations support record mode Foresight The point name that will be used when storing the next point Once a point is stored it will be incremented to the next available point Description The description for all the shots that are stored HR The length of the rod Zj v Opens the Smart Target options Start Recording Starts
298. t e The vertical alignment will have extra flat line segments pre pended or appended to match the length of the horizontal alignment e UnsymParaCurve elements will be converted into two parabolic curves on the vertical alignment If the first CrossSectSurf element in the file starts after the defined start station of the horizontal alignment a copy of the CorssSectSurf element will be added at the start station e If the center line elevation defined in the CrossSectSurf element differs from the actual center line elevation as defined by the vertical alignment the left and right templates will have a zero width starting segment added at the inner most node called Subgrade Adjustment to account for the difference e Once all CrossSectSurf elements have been loaded and converted to templates each template will be padded on the outer most node with additional zero width segments to ensure each station has the same number of defined segments All of these changes will be noted in the results dialog after importing the Land XML road for review by the user You can save this report to a file by tapping and holding on the results dialog New Road Screen Edit Road Roads Edit Roads New or Edit The New Road screen is identical to the Edit Road screen and is used to assemble the parts of a road or edit an existing road This screen consists of five separate index card style tabs Each tab accesses a different card that is us
299. t Traverse on Spiral Main Index Curve Solution Curve Curve Solution The Curve Solution screen provides detailed information on a curve when two parts of the curve are known The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following e Delta is the deflection angle e Length is the arc length e Chord is the chord length Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI e Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length e External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Solve Computes the details for the horizontal curve Layout opens the Horizontal Curve Layout screen where points can be created so the curve can be staked in the field Traverse opens the Traverse on Curve screen Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length 192 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Chord is the chord length Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent
300. t supports Station displays the station at the rod position Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position Elev displays the elevation at the rod position Offset displays if the rod position is to the right of the line left of the line or on the line Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Shot Data displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores the stake point 159 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Store Offset Points Stakeout Store Offset Points The Store Offset Points screen is used to store points in the current job at a specified offset from an existing polyline or alignment at a specified interval Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the station and offset will be computed from To From allows you to enter a range of points that define the line where the station and offset will be computed from Begin Station is the station assigned to the beginning of the line Next gt takes you to the next Store Offset Points screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Store Offset Points Screen 2 The second Store Offset Points screen is used to define the road profile or offset distances that will be used to compute the offset point coordinates 1 2 Road Width
301. t to import and then tap the button The points in the selected job will be added to the points in the current job Import CR5 Coordinates The Import CRS screen will open when importing coordinates from a CR5 coordinate file after selecting a layer Simply select the distance units that the coordinates were stored in and tap Import TXT Coordinates Since the coordinates in an ASCII TXT file can be stored in a variety of formats two screens are used to define the format of the file that is being imported once a layer is selected The source TXT file can contain either plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates Delimiters is the character that separates each column of text in the ASCII file Units are the units that the distances in the file were stored in Coordinates is used to specify if the coordinates are plane coordinates geodetic coordinates in degrees minutes seconds format or geodetic coordinates in decimal format Skip the first row should be checked if the first line in the ASCII file contains non coordinate information such as a heading Next gt opens the second screen Import TXT Coordinates Screen Two gt Name Column No gt Start Point Name When the first option is selected here the column number used for the name field in the TXT file is specified here When the second option is selected it is assumed that the TXT file does not contain point names and will assign the first po
302. tal station is over the correct point This routine does not store a new point Point The point from the project that will be compared to the observed point rod location Height of Rod The length of the rod Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen Take Shot Takes a shot and displays the deltas between the observed point and the selected point High delta values can indicate either the rod and or total station is over the wrong point The deltas can also be viewed in the Results screen and Map screen A A shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Solar Observation Survey Solar Observation The Solar Observation screen is used to compute the azimuth to an arbitrary backsight based on the position of a celestial body typically the sun Input Card WARNING Direct viewing of the sun without a proper filter will cause serious eye damage Pointing a total station directly toward the sun without a solar filter can also damage the EDM components 84 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Ha A shortcut to the Date Time Settings screen Lat Long The latitude and longitude of the total station These values can be scaled from a map such as a U S G S 7 5 minute quadrangle sheet or collected with a handheld GPS unit Aim Selects the portion of the celestial body that where you intend to aim You can select Left Edge of Center Center or Right Edge of Center Note Typically Left Edge of Center is selected when performing a sun s
303. tations Files Settings The Files Settings card allows you to select a feature code definition file 34 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Feature Code File Displays the selected feature code file FXL to use with the current job FXL files can be created and customized with the Spectra Precision Feature Definition Manager Browse Opens a dialog to select a feature code file to use with the current job Tap the filename and then tap Open Clear Closes the currently selected file so that it is no longer used with the current job Descriptions Settings Job Settings Descriptions or L from any Description field Description Settings The Descriptions Settings card allows you to select description code files and configure how descriptions are handled Use Description Code File Mark this item to use a description file that contains codes and click the associated Browse button to navigate to and select the file Description code files contain one code description pair per line where the code and description are separated by a space or a tab The code cannot contain spaces Use Description List File Mark this item to use a description file containing a list of descriptions without codes one description per line and click the associated Browse button to navigate to and select the file Load Description List from Job File Marking this item results in descriptions used in the current job as well as any new description
304. ted active conventional instrument to take a shot to the offset You can select from a number of laser range finders available on the Job Settings Instrument screen when in conventional mode The active instrument will always return a zenith and slope distance The active instrument may return a horizontal angle which will be treated as an azimuth Note If your laser range finder has a compass azimuth returned will be magnetic Use the Instrument Settings screen for your laser range finder to set magnetic declination to apply to the angle If you are using magnetic declination the laser range finder magnetic bearing will be corrected to geodetic using magnetic declination and then to grid using meridian convergence Store Prompts you for a description layer and feature code depending on your survey settings for the new offset point and stores the point for the current location Occupy Data Points The Occupy Data Points screen is used to collect measurements to new points This screen is used to occupy a point occupy an offset reference point and for feature collection Local Coordinates Displays the local coordinates computed from the current geodetic measurement Solution Quality Displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GNSS Status screen 114 Survey Pro Help 5
305. ter of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve PC Point is the point that defines the beginning of the curve Point of Curvature Azimuth Bearing is the direction of the tangent at the beginning of the curve Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC 198 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Store PT When checked will store the computed PT point with the specified point name Store RP When checked the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute and store the PT and if desired the radius point Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents Parabolic Curve Curve Parabolic Curve The Parabolic Curve screen provides detailed information
306. th the Traverse button New Backsight Point Displays the name of the new backsight point This would be the point you were just occupying Fixed Target Roving Target Select the target type at the backsight point Choose fixed target if you will use a dedicated target at the backsight Choose Roving Target if you will use the same target at the backsight as you will for foresight points HR Enter the height of the backsight target Send Circle Sends the entered Backsight Circle to the instrument Next gt Advances to the Check Setup page This button shows up when you are using check backsight as part of the station setup work flow Finish Records the setup and exits the wizard This button only shows up when you have Skip Check during Station Setup checked on the Surveying card of the Job Settings pages Point Exists Screen Survey Traverse Sideshot Traverse or Side Shot When performing a traverse or side shot and the foresight point name already exists the Point Exists screen will open where you select how to handle the new point Overwrite Existing Overwrite the existing point with the new coordinates Store Observation Stores the observation data but does not update the point coordinate The observation results will show you the differences between the observed coordinate and the existing coordinate Compute Average Computes an average coordinate using this new observation and all other observati
307. that will be assigned to the first offset point that is stored Each stored point that follows will be assigned the next available point number Description is the description that will be assigned to all the offset points that are stored Center Line offset points will be stored at locations on the centerline when checked Edge of Pavement offset points will be stored at the end of the first segment the edge of the roadbed on the left and or right side when checked Curb offset point will be stored at the end of the second segment the end of the curb or ditch on the left and or right side when checked Unselect All quickly unchecks all the checkboxes lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores all the offset points based on the information provided Stake DTM Stakeout Stake DTM The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut fill information between the point being staked and a reference DTM surface at the same horizontal coordinates You can also obtain volume information between the surface being staked and a specified reference elevation or the reference DTM surface The reference DTM surface can be defined by a layer in the current job or a file loaded on the data collector Either a DXF file containing a triangulated irregular network TIN or a digital terrain model DTM file can be used Consult the User s manual for more information Note The speed performance of the Stake DTM
308. the road respectively Rod Elev is the current elevation at the rod location Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point 148 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Cut Fill is the cut or fill required for the current rod location to be positioned on the design slope Toward CL Away CL is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it respectively before it is positioned at the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value On Station Back Sta Ahead Sta informs you if the rod is on the station being staked or the distance it must move parallel to the centerline back or ahead to be on the correct station HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point VD to HP is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point HD to CL is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline VD to CL is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Result
309. the settings for a GPS receiver when using the GeoLock feature It is only available from the Remote Control and Remote Shot screens when using a Trimble or Geodimeter robotic total station Survey Pro Help 5 00 File Menu The File Menu contains routines to open or create a new job import and export different file formats and transfer files between the Data Collector and another device Open New Index Save As Import Index Export Index Import Control Index Backup amp Restore Index Transfer Register Modules About Exit Main Index Open New Job Index Open New Screen Create New Job File Name Screen Create New Job Units and Format Screen Create New Job Select Control File Screen Create New Job Select Coordinate System Screen Create New Job Units and Format Screen Create New Job Enter First Point Screen Open File File Menu Index Main Index Import Data Index Import Coordinates Import Survey Pro version 5 Coordinates Import Survey Pro version 4 Coordinates Import CR5 Coordinates Import TXT Coordinates Import TXT Coordinates Screen 2 Import LandXML Import JobXML Confirm Point Replace File Menu Index Main Index Survey Pro Help 5 00 Export Data Index Export Coordinates Export Coordinates Select Points Export Survey Pro version 5 survey Coordinates Export Survey Pro version 4 JOB Coordinates Export Survey Pro version 4 JOB RAW File Pair Export Survey Pro version 4 JOB
310. the shift key from a soft input panel and lastly tap the last point in the point range Individual points in a point range can be selected unselected by tapping the control key from a soft input panel and then tapping the desired points Note Double tapping on a point will open that point in the editor Insert Opens a screen where a new point can be added Delete Delete the selected point Find Search for a point by its description Find Next Find the next point that contains the description entered when using the Find button Go To Opens a dialog box where any point can be quickly located by the entered point name 43 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Edit Points multiple point editing Job Edit Points Edit When more than one point is selected This screen is accessed after tapping Edit when more than one point is selected The change made in this screen will be applied to all the selected points Description When checked allows you to change all the selected point s descriptions to the Description entered in the description edit field Layer When checked allows you to move the selected points to the layer selected in the layer edit control Note Only user entered points key in or imported can be placed on the Control layer If any of the points in the selection are derived from measurements then the control layer will not be an option in the layer edit box Elevation When checked
311. tically with live data from the instrument A Start Stop button allows you to toggle the field between live mode and data entry mode When a field is in live mode it is updated constantly and cannot be edited Only one field can be live at a time Hotkeying to a new dialog and starting a live field will stop any live fields on the previous dialog Angle Direction fields Populated with angle and direction information Distance fields Populated when new shot data comes in either from a continuous measurement or a single measurement initiated by the user The fields are populated with the HD or VD converted from the returned SD adjusted for earth curve PPM and prism constant HI and HT are not taken into account Location Elevation fields Only show Start Stop once a Backsight setup is completed After a Backsight setup is completed the fields populate when shot data comes in either from a continuous measurement or a single measurement initiated by the user These fields do take HI and HT into account MSR MSR2 Key Support The following table lists the routines that support MSR MSR2 keys to take shots e The MSR key takes a shot with the currently selected SmartTarget e The MSR2 key takes a reflectorless shot with a 0 0 prism constant and a 0 0 height of rod It also stores the shot as a Sideshot if able when used in the Traverse Sideshot and Quick Shot routines Note For Spectra Precision Focus 30 Stakeout functions if
312. tion shots are performed is selected in the Repetition_Settings screen Foresight The name of the point that will be stored Number of Sets The desired number of sets to shoot to the backsight and foresight Note One set is equivalent to two shots to the backsight and foresight point HR The rod height Z i Opens the Smart Target options Average of Shows the average angle or distance to the foresight from all the shots taken The value in parenthesis is the total number of repetitions performed Worst Residual Displays the worst residual calculated from all the sets of the selected measurement type Description The description for the point that is being stored This field appears prior to storing the new point Note A residual is the difference between a single measurement and the average of all the measurements Note If a residual exceeds the tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen that value is displayed in bold text HA ZA SD Allows you to replace the current repetition data for the corresponding button with new data Once tapped the repetition data for the tapped button will be deleted You will then need to perform all sets defined in the Number of Sets field again where the new data will replace the corresponding deleted data All Open a screen that asks if you want to add an additional set to those already done or start over 15 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Toss Delete the corresponding set t
313. tion will use the minimum number of points required so there will be no redundancy of the solution and therefore no way to verify the results You should occupy a check point at some time during the survey to check the quality of your solution One Point Solves a valid calibration using the one control point collected then open the Data Collection screen Note The One Point button appears in place of the Start Now gt button when the conditions for One Point setup are met You must be in Default Ground Calibration projection mode e You can have only two points in the job file One point must be the control you just collected and the other is a new point you chose as your initial base setup location 109 Survey Pro Help 5 00 e You cannot yet have a coordinate system initialized or solved lt Back Tap to return to the previous screen Occupy Check Setup The Occupy Check Setup screen is similar to the Occupy Control Setup screen Start Check Point Occupy Opens the Occupy Check Point screen Solve Calibration Results The Solve Calibration Results screen is used to display the results of the GNSS Resection Backsight as well as make any changes to the horizontal and or vertical control point assignments You can also use this screen to access the Calibration Settings screen to input the calibration parameters manually Before the Solve Calibration screen opens the calibration is computed using all the assigned contr
314. tive value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node toward the centerline Note If an offset occurs past the edge of the road no vertical or cut fill information will be computed for that point Subgrade When checked allows you to specify a vertical offset from the actual node locations Positive values result in the stake location occurring below the selected node Negative values result in the stake location occurring above the selected node Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt takes you to the next Stake Road screen where the direction and distance information to the stake point is displayed Stake Road Screen 3 The third Stake Road screen displays distance direction and other information about the point to be staked Station displays the station where the stake point occurs and the type of line segment it falls on in the alignment Segment displays the name of the segment tangent to the point to be staked if the point is on the Left or Right side of the road and the specified offset if any Angle Right is the horizontal angle from the backsight to the stake point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the total station to the stake point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the total station to the stake point ZE to Rod is the zenith angle from the total station to the stake point Circle Zero is used to modify the c
315. tive receiver If this fails or if the active receiver is not a Trimble receiver or the Spectra Precision Epoch 25 receiver a message appears and the setting reverts to SD Card e If the change is successful the file list is repopulated with the appropriate files Download Selected Tap to downloads the selected files to Survey Pro Jobs Delete After Download Select to delete the files after they are successfully downloaded to Survey Pro Jobs Note If your connection is to the SD card or a Trimble receiver with firmware greater than version 3 8 a message appears to warn you that it is not possible to reverse the deletion Delete Selected Deletes the selected files from the receiver If your connection is to the SD card or a Trimble receiver with firmware gt 3 8 then you see a message warning you that there is no undelete Recoverable Files tab Lists the details of all the files on the receiver that were recently deleted Files can be selected from this list and recovered Recover Selected File s Restores the selected files on the receiver Start Static Survey Start Static When you are starting a static post processing survey you will first be prompted to select a receiver with the Connect to Post Process Receiver screen Connect to Post Process The Connect to Post Process screen is used to select a receiver capable of post process data logging The function and interface of the list of receivers is described
316. to automatically accept data collection points when the criteria is met When checked both the data and Offset Shots screens will automatically accept points once the measurement is better than the specified criteria Data collection routines will always collect at least 5 seconds worth of data before automatically accepting points based on criteria Epoch Averaging Set a number of epochs to average in the software If this number is greater than one the software will use the number of epochs specified to calculate the final position using a simple non weighted average Note This function is not appropriate for every receiver Some receivers when dynamics are set to static use Kalman filtering and other superior techniques to calculate an average position In this case the position returned from the receiver is better with each epoch and you may degrade your result by averaging with the software You should check with your receiver manufacturer for specific recommendations on field procedure 32 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Post Process Settings Job Settings Post Process The Post Process card is used to configure the settings for logging post processing data and the collecting and storing of post processing points in the software RTK Autonomous Points Specify action to take when accepting autonomous points during RTK data collection There are three options Do not store Select to prohibit acceptance of autonomous points
317. to store course precision GPS points Target opens a screen where you can select the target point to navigate to Store WP opens the Store GNSS Sideshot screen where you can store a new autonomous GPS point Best Fit opens the Best Fit screen below used to add control points to the best fit solution Map Page The Map Page of the Navigation screen displays a map of the points in the current job and your current position 167 Survey Pro Help 5 00 When stationary your position is marked with a flashing green circle When moving a green triangle is displayed that represents your current position and direction of travel and a blue arrow indicates your velocity When navigating a red arrow points from your current position to the target E Zoom Extents Button will change the scale of the screen so that all the points in the current job will fit on the screen A Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 e Zoom Out Button will zoom the current screen out by approximately 25 Q Zoom Window Button allows you to drag a box across the screen When your finger or stylus leaves the screen the map will zoom to the box that was drawn Q Zoom to Point Button prompts you for a point name and then the map view will be centered to the specified point with the point label displayed in red E expands a list where you can select additional map options Target Page The Target Page is used to direct yo
318. ton will be labeled Use and will copy the converted distance to the corresponding distance field Average Points Cogo Average Points The Average Points routine will compute the average location from any number of existing points Note This routine will compute an average coordinate from the selected individual points If you wish to compute an average coordinate from multiple observations you should select Compute Average when prompted by the Point Exists Screen The first screen is used to select the points you want to use for computing the average To From opens the Select Points screen where you can specify the points you want to include Tap Points opens a map view where you can tap on the points you want to include M The power button opens a list of alternative methods to select the points to average or view a list of points already selected The Select by distance option opens a screen where you can select multiple points by first selecting any point as the Radius Point and then specifying a Distance from that point The radius point and any other points within the specified distance to it will be included in the average computation Next gt opens the next screen Average Points Screen 2 The second screen is used to view the coordinates of the average point optionally adjust the data used to compute the average and optionally save the point The lower portion of the screen displays all the selected
319. tribute icon will show if the attributes have been entered e Delete Tap the x to remove this code from the point opens up the Pick a Feature Screen where you can key in any code you wish or select one from a list of codes defined in the Feature File FXL Pick a Feature The Pick a Feature screen is used to enter a feature code string You can pick a feature code from the list of codes or you can enter the string directly into the edit field If you are using a Feature Code File FXL you can pick from the list of codes defined in the file or you can enter any other code string to define a new feature If you are not using a Feature Code File you can simply enter any string you wish to define the feature code for a point Filtered By shows the current selection filter You can tap on the filter icon to change the view filter Feature Code enter the text string for a code or double tap on the list to select the code string for an existing code Note You can enter a code and the line work control code separated by a space in the Feature Code edit field or you can enter just the feature code and then assign the line work code with by tapping the line work icon next for that feature code in the list of codes for this point Edit Polylines Job Edit Polylines The Edit Polylines screen is used to add edit and delete polylines in the current job The first screen will display a list of all the polylines that are stored i
320. tton on this page Radio Settings Screen The Radio Settings screen is used to configure settings of the base or rover radio modem All settings available are described below However not all radios support all of the described settings so if you do not see one of these fields it is because the radio type does not support it 28 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Channel Select the channel the radio will use to communicate with the other radio Sensitivity Select the sensitivity of the radio Mode Select the transmit format used by the base radio The rover radio must be listening for same format the base is broadcasting Baud Displays the baud rate the radio is currently set to There is no way for the software to change this value so you must set the receiver to radio communications to match what you see here Parity Displays the parity the radio is currently set to Set Sends commands to the radio firmware to configure the settings selected on this screen Note Some settings on the radio cannot be modified with the software To fully program the radio modems you need to PC software that should be supplied with the radio Cell Phone Settings Edit Modem or Manage Modems Edit The Cell Phone Settings screen is used to create or modify a cell phone data modem configuration Auto Answer Command Alternate Hayes AT command to use for auto answering Note The default auto answer command ATEOSO 1 default dial command A
321. tware will run in Demo Mode When running in Demo Mode users are able to test and use every routine available in the software Although Demo Mode limits all jobs to no more than 25 points If a job exists on the data collector that contains more than 25 points it cannot be opened while running in Demo Mode Registered Indicates that the corresponding module has been added Enter Registration Code Opens the Register screen where the registration number for a particular module can be entered About File About The About screen displays the version of the software Hardware Information is a shortcut to the Windows System Information screen Survey Pro Help 5 00 Job Menu Index Settings Index Edit Points Index Edit Polylines Index Edit Alignment Index Auto Linework View Raw Data Index DTM Index Manage Layers Job Information Calculator Manage Pictures Take Pictures Main Index Settings Index Instrument Settings Index GNSS Module Settings Index Units Settings Format Settings Files Settings Descriptions Settings Surveying Settings Scale Factor Settings Scale Settings Calculate Scale Stakeout Settings Repetition Settings Date Time Settings NMEA GPS Settings Data Out settings Buttons Settings General Settings Job Menu Index Main Index Instrument Settings Index Instrument Settings Screen 1 Instrument Settings Screen 2 GNSS Module Settings Index 20 Survey Pro Hel
322. u can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on Set HR to open the Receiver Antenna screen Accept Updates the projection with the vertical solution calculated from the control point observation and adjusts the job coordinates to the latest projection Occupy Benchmark Opens the Occupy Control Point screen where the measurement is taken by the rover on the 127 Survey Pro Help 5 00 remote benchmark The New Elevation field of the Remote Elevation screen will then display the calculated elevation for the base point to be set on tapping Accept Import GNSS Control Survey Import GNSS Control The Import GNSS Control wizard is used to merge an accurate NEE location control point source with a GNSS collected point in the job file This point will then be designated as a GNSS control point and can be used to solve a calibration adjustment Solving the calibration adjustment can be done automatically at the end of this wizard manually after the end of this wizard or at a later time There are three methods to import the control point source Import from an XML format OPUS Solution Report Import from a text format NGS Datasheet file e Key in a coordinate in NEE LLH WGS84 or LLH local Select Points and Import So
323. u to the current target When you are close to the target the graphic will change to help you more accurately locate the point Show N E When selected the directions to travel are displayed are displayed in a Northing Easting format Show Azi Dist When selected the directions to travel are shown as an azimuth and distance Position Page The Position Page is used to view the coordinates for your current position View GPS Position Displays your current position in geodetic coordinates when selected View Local Position Displays your current position in ground coordinates This can only be selected after a Best Fit solution is computed or if a coordinate system projection is solved Status opens the Sky Plot screen to view the GPS satellite constellation Navigation Best Fit Screen Stakeout Navigation Best Fit The Best Fit screen is used to compute the rotation and scale necessary to align the geodetic coordinate system from the GPS receiver with the ground coordinate system used in the current job A minimum of two points must be recorded to compute a Best Fit solution Note The Best Fit button is not available when a coordinate system projection is solved Point is the point in the job that you are occupying and want to add to the Best Fit solution Add Control and Re Solve Tap this while remaining stationary over the point The position will be measured and added to the Best Fit solution You will then retu
324. u will see a yellow arrow and the status line will indicate the poor geometry of the control points or if the calibration fails to solve you will see a yellow arrow and the status the status line will indicate the failure to solve the calibration The list of GNSS control points is shown in the box along with the horizontal and or vertical assignment of each point You can tap on the H and or V column for each point to change the dimension assigned to use in the solution You can double tap on any point to see details about that point When the calibration is solved you will see horizontal and vertical residuals errors in the columns for each point used for that dimension Add Point Tap to open the Occupy Check Setup screen where you can select additional points to add as control for the calibration solution Details Tap to open the Projection Details screen and shows the exact numeric parameters of the pending calibration solution Resolve Tap to recalculate the solution This button appears if you change the horizontal or vertical control point assignments Finish Tap to apply the calibration solution and open the Data Collection screen Note The calibration blunder detection routine will attempt to determine if there are any blunders in the GNSS control points used This detection is done independently of the residuals of the least squares solution The blunder detection routine is limited to a maximum of 15 GNSS control
325. uick Pick list Move Up will move the routine selected in the right column up one level toward the top of the list lt Remove will remove the selected routine from the current Quick Pick list Move Down will move the routine selected in the right column down one level toward the bottom of the list Select Points From any screen that contains a To From button The Select Point s screen is used to define a simple list of points or a list of points that define a line that can include curves depending on where the screen is accessed from Examples of how to enter different lists of points are displayed in the lower portion of the screen Point Range is the area where you enter your point list using the same format as shown in the examples Note Spaces in point lists are ignored They are only used in the examples for clarity Once the list is entered tap to return to the previous screen The examples for entering curves are explained in detail as follows e 7 8 9 The first example defines a curve that passes through Points 7 8 and 9 respectively e 7 8 L 9 The second example defines a curve where Point 8 is the radius point and the curve begins to the Left from the point of view of the radius point turning from Point 7 to Point 9 Note When defining a curve with a radius point the other two points must be the same distance from the radius point for a solution 225 Survey Pro Help 5 00 e 7 100 L L 9
326. up screen is used to pick the zone and datum type for the new zone as well as set the azimuth orientation and grid direction for the new zone Zone Type Select what kind of map projection to use for the new zone The options are e Transverse Mercator e Lambert 1 Parallel e Lambert 2 Parallel e Stereographic Oblique Stereographic e Oblique Mercator Angle Datum Type Select what kind of datum to use for the new zone The options are e Pick from database Choose this option to add a data base datum and ellipsoid to the new zone 123 Survey Pro Help 5 00 e Custom Molodensky Choose this option to use a custom 3 parameter datum transformation with either a custom ellipsoid or a data base ellipsoid e Custom Similarity Choose this option to use a 7 parameter datum transformation with either a custom ellipsoid or a data base ellipsoid Grid and Azimuth Parameters is where you select the grid azimuth and the positive coordinate direction The options are North Azimuth Set a north azimuth for your new zone e South Azimuth Set a south azimuth for your new zone e North East Grid Set the coordinates increasing positive in the north east direction e South West Grid Set the coordinates increasing positive in the south west direction Key In Zone Mapping Plane Parameters The Key In Zone Mapping Plane Parameters screen is used to enter the values for the map projection zone The parameters required depend on the zone ty
327. urb Ditch When checked a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement Shape 1 gt lt 2 3 H 4 when staking a curb ditch this button allows you to select the shape of the curb ditch or slope beyond the edge of pavement so cut fill information can be computed on this surface if a random offset is specified The selected shape is displayed by an icon next to the button as well as with a bold line in the road s cross sectional profile at the bottom of the screen Note The selected Shape is irrelevant if a random offset is not specified since the nodes are always in the same place for each shape that uses the same Height and Offset values Height is the height of the curb ditch or slope in feet or meters A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch Offset From Edge of Road is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement Note The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen 3 The third Offset Staking screen is used to select the station and section of the road to be staked and to specify an offset distance from the design point 144 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Station to Stake is the station to be staked Station Interval specifies how far to advance from the current station to t
328. urce The first screen is used to select the job points you want to merge with accurate NEE coordinates to convert to GNSS control and select how you will enter the control point source to get the accurate NEE To From Opens the Select Point s screen where you can select points by specifying a point range Tap Points Opens a map view where you can select points by tapping them on the screen Select a method Used to select from the following sources for accurate coordinates e OPUS Solution Results xml file NGS Data Sheet txt file e Key In Coordinate Next gt Opens one of two possible screens depending on the choice made for the Select a Method field in the first screen Enter Control Coordinate OPUS or NGS Data Sheet The purpose of this screen is to pick a data sheet point or OPUS solution file to use as the control point source This is the second screen that appears when either OPUS Solution or NGS Data Sheet was selected in the first screen Point Displays the name of the selected job point that the control point source will be merged into Search this directory Displays the path to look for OPUS xml or NGS txt files Browse Opens a new screen where you can select a different path to search for OPUS xml or NGS txt files On all txt files in the specified directory are read and any valid data sheet points that are within 100 meters are then put into the drop down list below Select the RINE
329. ust be within the boundary of the DTM before any cut fill information is provided 3D View opens the 3D View screen consult the conventional surveying Reference manual where a 3D view of the DTM can be viewed from any angle as well as cut fill information for the current location Note The 3D View button is only available when Generate TIN w Staked Points is checked in the previous screen and at least three stake points have been stored Store stores a point at the current rover location with the point name shown in the St Pt field and the description in the Desc field Also advances the St Pt to the next available point name St Pt is the point name that will be assigned to the next stored point Desc is the description that will be assigned to the next stored point HR is the height of the rod Data shows the northing easting and elevation of the current rover location Result shows the computed elevation of the DTM at the current location and the cut or fill necessary to bring the elevation at the current location to the elevation of the DTM at the current location C L shows the current station and offset information for the rover location relative to the selected centerline The type of line segment in the polyline at the current station is also displayed This card is only available if the With C L checkbox was checked in the previous screen Note Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger
330. uter edge of the last segment at the current station Shot Data Card Displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot Station Equation Roads Road Stakeout Equation Settings or Roads Slope Staking Equation Settings or Roads Show Station Equation Settings The Station Equation screen is used to configure the stationing for an alignment with stationing that changes at a specific location This situation might occur where the road you are staking merges with another road and once you stake past the point where the roads merge you want to use the stationing assigned to the other road Once you pass the location where the stationing changes all ahead stations are displayed with a 2 after it to differentiate between a back and ahead station such as 11 00 2 Likewise when keying in an ahead station you must append it with a 2 to indicate it is an ahead station Road Name Displays the name of the current alignment Back Defines the stationing on the back alignment where the stationing change occurs Ahead Defines what the new stationing is for the same location defined in the Back field Increase indicates the stationing should increase as you move forward past the location where the stationing changes Decrease indicates the stationing should decrease as you move forward past the location where the stationing changes Note When Stake Corners Not Just Even Intervals is checked
331. utomatically A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional Warning When creating a new job it is important that the Units for Distances field be set to the correct units This allows you to seamlessly switch between different units in mid job Problems can arise if these units are inadvertently set to the incorrect units when entering new data For example assume you created a control file by hand entering a list of coordinates in a new job where the job was set to International Feet and the coordinates being entered were in US Survey Feet Now assume you created another new job and correctly set it to US Survey Feet If you then selected the previous job as a control file for the new job the 33 Survey Pro Help 5 00 display of all of the coordinates in the control file would be converted from International Feet to US Survey Feet Units for Angles Defines the units used for angles as Degrees or Grads gons Display Directions as Display directions as a Bearing or Azimuth Azimuth type Defines if you are using a North Azimuth or a South Azimuth Grid Direction specifies if your grid coordinates are increasing positive in the North East or the South West direction Coord Order Allows you to customize the labeling and order for coordinates used throughout the software You can select any of the following formats N E Elev Northing Easting Elevation X Y Z E N Elev Easting Northing Elevation X Z
332. v coordinates Point Starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified Point Start Station The station on the alignment that corresponds with the starting location or point Edit Alignment Screen General Tab The General tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to describe the alignment and select the layer where it is located Description The description of the alignment Layer The layer where the alignment will be located Attributes Opens the Point Feature Attributes screen where the feature attributes for the alignment can be selected Edit Segment The Edit Segment screen is accessed anytime an existing horizontal or vertical segment is added or edited A variety of segment editing screens are possible depending on the type of segment being edited or created Each segment editor is discussed below Edit Segment Line Card The Line card is used to add a straight horizontal line segment in the alignment 50 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Length The horizontal length of the line Make this segment tangent to previous When checked the specified line will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment Note When making a new horizontal segment tangent to the previous segment the new segment will appear in the Edit Alignment screen tagged with a P This means that if the previous horizontal segment is edited or deleted where the orientation changes all subsequent horizont
333. ver times sessions counting down Elapsed Displays the time elapsed since this receiver was put into static mode if a session is in progress This field only shows when your receiver times sessions counting up Free Memory Displays the amount of memory remaining on the disk where post processing data is stored This will usually be the receiver s built in memory or the receiver s removable memory card For some brands and models this may be disk space on the data collector HDOP VDOP Satellites Used Satellites Locked See the Receiver card Sky View The Sky View card displays a plot of the satellites tracked and the elevation mask boundary SV Used SV Lock See the Receiver card Elev Mask Displays the elevation mask for satellite tracking currently set on the General card of the Receiver Settings screen Reset Mask Elev Mask Displays the elevation mask currently set on the General card of the Receiver Settings screen For receivers that support changing the elevation mask outside of receiver setup you can enter a new value here and tap Reset Mask Reset Mask Changes the current elevation mask to the value entered in the Elev Mask field Note If the receiver setup has not yet been performed the elevation mask will not be displayed Also if you have changed the elevation mask setting and have not yet reconfigured this receiver the value you see on this display will be the value from the settings and
334. vey Post Processing Start gt or Survey Occupy or in GNSS mode Survey Control Points Post Process The Stop Go Receiver Session screen is used to mark the beginning and end of static segments during the stop and go post processing log file You can enter the point name and descriptions of the static segments as well as change the antenna height for occupations This screen is also used in GNSS mode if you want to record an extra occupation to log file when logging post processing simultaneous with RTK 133 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Point Enter the station name for the stop and go point Description Enter the description for the stop and go point Session Duration Allows you to specify how long you want each static occupation during the stop and go file to last Log Until Stop Check this control to have the static occupation continue until you tap Stop If this is unchecked the static occupation will last as many minutes and seconds that you have set in the duration edit fields Start Marks the beginning of a static point occupation with the entered Site ID and Description Apply Updates the static occupation with any changes of the Site ID Description or antenna height This button only appears after you have tapped Start to begin a static occupation and only for brands and models that support this function Stop Marks the end of the static occupation End Recording Post Process End Recording
335. vey Pro Help 5 00 Quick Codes Survey Quick Codes The Quick Codes screen is used to rapidly take shots with different description codes Foresight Is where you enter the foresight point name Note If you specify an existing point in the Foresight field you are prompted to overwrite or use the next available point You will not have the option to store an observation HR The height of the rod Zj v1 Opens the Smart Target options Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where you can set and check your station occupy point and backsight Tap any of the buttons to take a shot and store the point with the description of the button label This shot is taken using the current smart target and all relevant settings The point is stored with the description labeled on the button for example Ditch or TOPO You can also tap Enter to take a shot with the last used button Note Storing points in this routine does not change the last user specified description used in any survey routine Note To enter a new description or edit an existing button description in the Quick Codes screen tap and hold the button The Quick Code button labels are saved in the Program Files Survey Pro QuickCodes ini file You can copy these files from one data collector to another to preload the list Corner amp 2 Lines Survey Corner amp 2 Lines The Corner and 2 Lines screen is used to store a point at the corner of a structure using a r
336. w point is stored and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Backsight Opens the Station Setup screen where the current backsight can be modified MH A shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Radial Sideshots Survey Radial Sideshots The Radial Sideshots routine combines the functionality of the Multiple Sideshots routine with the accuracy of the Repetition Shots routine It is used to perform repetition shots to a backsight and any number of foresights side shots 76 Survey Pro Help 5 00 from the same occupy point Ml Accesses the Surveying Settings screen and Radial Sideshot Settings screen which is identical to the Repetition Settings screen with the exception of the choices for the Shooting Sequence Select B gt F1 gt gt Fn4F1 gt gt Fn gt B to shoot all Face 2 side shots in the same order as the Face 1 side shots or B gt F1 gt gt Fn 4Fn gt gt F1 gt B to shoot the Face 2 side shots in reverse order Option When shooting the first set measuring a distance and angle for each shot is required but when starting all subsequent sets Angle Only can also be selected for this field Number of Sets Where the desired number of sets is specified Done with SS gt Used when you are finished shooting side shots This is only available while taking Face 1 side shots for the first set Shoot Shoot BS Used to shoot the current point If the sh
337. where you can solve for an elevation at a specified station or solve for a station at a specified elevation Results PVC sta is the station at the PVC PVI sta is the station at the PVI PVT sta is the station at the PVT Hi Lo sta is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero the crest of the curve Elev is the elevation for the respective point Parabolic Layout Curve Parabolic Layout The Parabolic Layout screen allows you to compute an elevation at a specified station or a station at a specified elevation Beg Grade is the percent grade at the PVC End Grade is the percent grade at the PVT Curve Length is the horizontal distance between the PVC and PVT PVC Station is the starting station at the PVC PVC Elevation is the elevation at the PVC Solve for is where you select to solve for an unknown Elevation or an unknown Station The selection made here determines which of the following choices will be available Interval When checked the Current station can be incremented by the specified interval by using the Sta and Sta 200 Survey Pro Help 5 00 buttons and then re computed with the Layout button Current station is the station that will be solved for with the Layout button Elevation is the known elevation for the location s on the parabolic curve where you want to compute the station s Solve computes the details of the vertical curve Sta decreases
338. will be deleted Properties opens the Archive Properties screen Backup when selected tapping Next gt will begin the backup routine where the data for the current job will be stored to the selected archive Restore when selected tapping Next gt will begin the restore routine where the data from the selected archive will be restored overwriting the current job Next gt opens the next screen Backup Restore Archive Properties File Backup Restore Properties The Archive Properties screen lists the files stored within the selected archive along with other information The file sizes listed in this screen are in bytes Since all backup archives are compressed the file sizes displayed represent the compressed files or the amount of space actually being used by the file s on the data collector View Snapshot will display the snapshot from the selected archive if one was included when the archive was originally created Backup Restore Backup When performing a backup all the files associated with the current job are listed and will be included in the archive Create Snapshot When checked the next screen will prompt you to create a snapshot of the current job s map view 17 Survey Pro Help 5 00 which will then be included in the archive lt Back returns to the previous screen Backup opens the next screen Backup Restore Create a Snapshot The Create a Snapshot scr
339. will be reminded to backup the current job prior to closing it Prompt for Elevation of 2D Cogo Points When checked a majority of the COGO routines will prompt you for an elevation before storing a 2D point When unchecked 2D points will be stored without the prompt Always Use ALL CAPS in Edit Fields When checked characters will always be entered using capital letters in edit fields regardless of the keyboard setting Log Serial Port Traffic When checked all serial port traffic will be logged to a text file called TDS Log txt for troubleshooting purposes and is stored in the Jobs folder The file is automatically overwritten when logging traffic on a date that is different from the previous date Use Smart Soft Input Panel Activation When checked the SIP will automatically open when the cursor is inside an input field and close when the cursor is moved outside an input field Not available on Ranger data collectors Edit Points Job Edit Points The Edit Points screen allows you to add edit and delete any points in the current job Edit If only a single point is selected this will open the point in the Edit Point Screen where the details of the point can be modified If more than one point is selected the Edit Points Screen will open where the description layer and elevation for the selected points can be modified simultaneously Note Multiple points can be selected by tapping the first point in a range then tap
340. y Pro Help 5 00 Note This setting is only available when your receiver model is Hiper Network Settings Job Settings Networks Card To add a new network to the list tap the add network icon in the Networks tab Name Enter a unique name for the network server Address Enter the IP address for the network server Port Enter the IP port for the network server Save Tap to save the network To rename a network tap the gear icon and change the Address and Port if required Measure Mode Settings Job Settings Measure Mode The Measure Mode card is used to configure the RTK data collection settings Accept Solution Quality Control the solution quality acceptable for storing measurements You have two options e Fixed RTK only Allows storage of fixed solution only e Code Float or Fix Allows storage of any differential solution Use Acceptance Criteria Select to apply criteria to measurement acceptance When checked only measurements with RMS and or PDOP values below the threshold will be accepted To use less than all three criteria check this box but enter 0 0 for the criteria you do not wish to apply e H RMS Horizontal RMS threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance e V RMS Vertical RMS threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance e PDOP PDOP threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance Automatically Accept Data Collection Select
341. you are using on the local machine COM 1 is the only available serial port on a Ranger Baud Rate specifies the communications speed The baud rate must match in both units for successful communications Parity specifies the parity The parity must match in both units When in doubt select None here All transfers are controlled from the PC when in this special mode 18 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Enter Server Mode places the data collector in server mode where all file transfers are controlled from a PC running either TDS Survey Link or TDS ForeSight Tapping Cancel will disconnect server mode Send File will open the Open screen where the file that you want to send can be selected Once selected the file is sent from the data collector to the specified device A progress bar will be displayed that indicates how much of the file has been transferred Tapping x Cancel will stop the file transfer Note The Send routine should be initiated shortly after issuing the receive command on the other device Receive File allows you to receive a file from another device This should be tapped prior to issuing the Send command on the other device Tapping Cancel will stop the file transfer Register Modules File Register Modules The Register Modules screen is used to upgrade the software Refer to the User s Manual for more information on registering additional modules If no modules have been registered the sof
342. you can tap multiple points To From provides selection of points by point name Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Inverse point to all selected points Results Azimuth is the azimuth from the Inverse Point to the selected point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point Slope Dist is the slope distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point North is the change in the Y coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point East is the change in the X coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point 179 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Inverse Point to Location Point Inverse Location Point The Inverse Point to Location Point screen will calculate the distance and direction from any point or location to another point or location Begin is the reference point or location used to compute the distance and direction to another point or location End is the other point or location whose correlation to the Begin point or location is computed Each location is defined by one of the following methods e Location when selected the coordinates for any location can be entered in the appropriate fields e Point when selected any existing point name can be entered in the appropriate field or selected from a map view e Store Pt When checked will store a point f
343. you want to use the MSR key to update shot data you must set Use Manual Updating Remote Control option for MSR key support in the Stakeout Settings Routine MSR IMSR2 Supported Supported 95 Survey Pro Help 5 00 ae Fields Yes Yes Quick Stake Yess Repetition Shots Shot Prompt Yes pamor Shot Yes ao Stakeout Stake List of Points Yes Stakeout StakeToLine Yes Stakeout Offset Staking Yes Stakeout Slope Staking Yes Stakeout Point Slope Staking Yes Stakeout Line and Offset Yes Stakeout Curve and Offset Yes Stakeout Spiral and Offset Yes Stakeout Show Station Yes Stakeout Stake DTM dees Stakeout Station Staking Yes Roads Road Stakeout Yes Roads Slope Staking C C Roads Show Station dees 96 Survey Pro Help 5 00 The items available in the Survey Menu with the GNSS module depend the current state of the setup There are four states e No RTK survey is setup e Base is set up but the rest of the RTK survey is not set up e Base and rover are setup but the required calibration is not yet solved e Setup complete base rover and calibration The Survey Menu contents are listed below for each of the four states Survey Menu RTK GNSS Mode Survey not in Session GNSS Status Index Start Survey Index Start Base Index Projection Index Import GNSS Control Receiver Information Projection Calculator Index File Management Survey Menu RTK GNSS Mode Base Set Up but Survey not in Sessio
344. zones in the database that have no preset datum Use Geoid check to use a geoid model with the selected coordinate system Geoid select the geoid model to use with the zone when Use Geoid is checked lt Back returns you to the Select Control File Screen Next gt opens the Enter First Point Screen where you can enter a coordinate for your first point in the new job Create a New Job Enter First Point Screen Enter First Point when this box is checked the additional fields will appear allowing you to create a new point 8 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Note You can create a job with no initial point Point Name is the name of the initial point Northing is the Y coordinate of the initial point Easting is the X coordinate of the initial point Elevation is the elevation of the initial point Description is the description of the initial point Note When you are doing a survey in a south west grid system the meaning of the X Y axes are reversed so the south coordinate is labeled on the X axis and the west coordinate is labeled on the Y axis lt Back returns you to the Select Coordinate System Screen Finish creates the new job and stores the survey file with the initial settings x Cancel cancels the creation of a new job and brings you back to the Main Menu Open File Open New Browse The Open screen is used to open any existing job and is required to open a job that is not listed in the
345. zontally and vertically by a specified distance and direction 219 Survey Pro Help 5 00 Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view To From allows you to select points by typing in a point range Translate by Coordinates When checked all of the selected points will be adjusted in the same direction and distance as between a specified From point or location and a To point or location When unchecked the selected points will be adjusted by the specified direction and distance The choice made here determines the options available below Note The choice made above determines which fields will be available below Azimuth Bearing is the direction to move the selected points Horizontal Distance is the horizontal distance that the selected points are moved Vertical Distance is the vertical distance that the selected points are moved From is where the first point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted To is where the last point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted Point Location allows you to enter either a point name or location coordinates Solve adjusts the selected points in the same direction or distance as defined from the From point to the To point or by the direction and distance entered Rotate Adjust Rotate

Survey Pro Help 5.00 - Accurate Instruments

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents